Pd300 Multifunction Protection: Instruction Manual

PD300 MULTIFUNCTION PROTECTION
Instruction Manual
UME_PD300_eng Rev.: R (03/11)
© All rights reserved. No part of this
publication may be reproduced by whatever
means, without the prior written permission of
Ingeteam T&D.
Ingeteam T&D reserves the right to make any

changes without prior notice.
INDEX 
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ..........................................................................................................................................7

1.1 Manual scope ....................................................................................................................................................7
1.2 Functions ..........................................................................................................................................................7
1.3 Model coding .....................................................................................................................................................9
1.4 User interface ..................................................................................................................................................10
1.5 Hardware Configurations ...................................................................................................................................10
1.6 Environmental conditions ..................................................................................................................................12
1.7 Tests ..............................................................................................................................................................12
1.7.1 Electrical tests ........................................................................................................................................12
1.7.2 Environmental tests .................................................................................................................................13
1.7.3 Mechanical tests .....................................................................................................................................13
1.8 Wiring diagrams ...............................................................................................................................................14
1.9 Accuracy .........................................................................................................................................................21
1.9.1 Trafos saturation .....................................................................................................................................21
2. HARDWARE...........................................................................................................................................................22
2.1 Constructive characteristics. Horizontal box (PD300H)......................................................................................... 22
2.2 Constructive characteristics. Vertical box (PD300V) ............................................................................................. 22
2.3 Constructive characteristics. TCP mounted ......................................................................................................... 22
2.4 Rear terminals .................................................................................................................................................23
2.5 Options for rear communications ports: .............................................................................................................. 24
2.6 RS485 connection detail between some units ..................................................................................................... 25
2.7 Ethernet Communication ..................................................................................................................................25
2.7.1 Ethernet by GOF .....................................................................................................................................25
2.7.2 Ethernet through RJ45 cable .................................................................................................................... 26
2.8 Technical characteristics ..................................................................................................................................26
2.8.1 Auxiliary power supply voltage .................................................................................................................. 26
2.8.2 Output contacts ......................................................................................................................................27
2.8.3 Digital inputs (optoisolated) ..................................................................................................................... 27
2.8.4 IRIG-B input...........................................................................................................................................27
2.8.5 Phase and neutral current circuits (rated current 1/5 A) .............................................................................. 28
2.8.6 Voltage circuits .......................................................................................................................................28
2.9 Operating frequency .........................................................................................................................................29
2.10 Phase order ...................................................................................................................................................29
3. UNIT CONFIGURATION ..........................................................................................................................................30
3.1 Programming of digital AND LOGICAL inputs ...................................................................................................... 30
3.2 Flicker treatment in the digital inputs ................................................................................................................ 31
3.3 Programming of digital outputs ..........................................................................................................................32
3.4 Programming of LEDs .......................................................................................................................................33
3.5 Programming of logic outputs ............................................................................................................................33
3.6 Programming General Settings ..........................................................................................................................34
3.7 Differential Protection General setting Programming ............................................................................................ 34
3.8 Communication Configuration............................................................................................................................35
3.8.1 Front door Communication (Port 1_1) and rear port no. 2 (Port 1_2) ............................................................ 35
3.8.2 Communication via rear port nº 1 (Port 2) .................................................................................................. 35
3.8.3 Ethernet Communication .........................................................................................................................37
3.9 Other configuration settings ..............................................................................................................................38
3.9.1 Frequency ..............................................................................................................................................38
3.9.2 Language ...............................................................................................................................................38
3.9.3 Phase order ............................................................................................................................................38
3.9.4 Pushbuttons enabling and lockings by commands ...................................................................................... 38
3.9.5 Power supply supervision enabling ............................................................................................................ 38
3.9.6 External power supply supervision ............................................................................................................. 38
3.9.7 Temperature supervision ..........................................................................................................................38
3.9.8 Calibration .............................................................................................................................................38
3.9.9 Display contrast setting............................................................................................................................39
4. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS. DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS ....................................................................................... 40
4.1 Protection function locking ...............................................................................................................................40
4.2 Differential protection.......................................................................................................................................40
4.2.1 Percent characteristic ..............................................................................................................................41
4.2.2 Harmonic restraint ..................................................................................................................................41
Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

PD300 User Manual III
INDEX 
4.2.3 Instantaneous differential ........................................................................................................................42

4.2.4 Function 86 ...........................................................................................................................................43
4.3 Restricted earth protection ................................................................................................................................43
4.3.1 Winding 1/ Winding 2 ..............................................................................................................................43
4.3.2 Autotransformer ......................................................................................................................................43
4.4 Phase overcurrent protection .............................................................................................................................44
4.4.1 General description .................................................................................................................................44
4.4.2 Range of settings for timed characteristics (6 tables) .................................................................................. 44
4.4.3 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (low level) (6 tables) ....................................................... 45
4.4.4 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6 tables) ..................................................... 45
4.5 Residual overcurrent protection .........................................................................................................................45
4.5.2 Settings ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) .................................................................................. 46
4.5.4 Setting ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6 tables) ....................................................... 46
4.6 Current unbalance protection ............................................................................................................................46
4.6.2 Setting ranges for time unit characteristics (6 tables) ................................................................................. 47
4.6.3 Setting range for instantaneous characteristics (6 tables) ............................................................................ 47
4.7 Neutral overcurrent protection ...........................................................................................................................47
4.7.2 Range of settings for timed characteristic (6 tables) ................................................................................... 47
4.7.4 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6 tables) ..................................................... 48
4.8 Overvoltage Protection ......................................................................................................................................48
4.8.2 Settings ranges of the time characteristic (6 tables).................................................................................... 49
4.8.3 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (6 tables) . .................................................................... 49
4.9 UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION ........................................................................................................................49
4.9.2 Settings ranges of the time characteristic (6 tables).................................................................................... 50
4.9.3 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (6 tables) ...................................................................... 50
4.10 Overexcitation protection ................................................................................................................................51
4.10.1 5th harmonic .........................................................................................................................................51
4.10.2 V/f .......................................................................................................................................................51
4.11 Frequency protection ......................................................................................................................................51
4.11.1 Minimum frequency ..............................................................................................................................52
4.11.2 Maximum frequency ..............................................................................................................................52
4.12 Thermal Image...............................................................................................................................................52
4.12.1 Heating curves ......................................................................................................................................54
4.12.2 Cooling curves ......................................................................................................................................55
4.13 Breaker .........................................................................................................................................................56
4.13.1 Breaker failure protection.......................................................................................................................56
4.13.2 Operation Logic ....................................................................................................................................57
4.13.3 Breaker supervision ...............................................................................................................................57
4.13.4 Coil supervision ....................................................................................................................................57
5. DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTION ..............................................................................................................................59
5.1 Events reports..................................................................................................................................................59
5.2 Fault records ...................................................................................................................................................62
5.3 Measurements .................................................................................................................................................62
5.3.1 Measurements at the secondary ................................................................................................................ 63
5.3.2 Measurements at the primary ................................................................................................................... 64
5.4 Measurement historical report ...........................................................................................................................64
5.5 Statistical data ................................................................................................................................................65
5.6 Protection status ..............................................................................................................................................65
5.6.1 By keyboard / display ...............................................................................................................................65
5.6.2 Through PC (Protections Console) ............................................................................................................. 65
5.7 Oscillograph data recorder ................................................................................................................................66
6. OTHER FUNCTIONS...............................................................................................................................................67
6.1 Time setting and synchronization .......................................................................................................................67
6.1.1 Time setting ...........................................................................................................................................67
6.1.2 Synchronization ......................................................................................................................................67

PD300 User Manual IV
INDEX 
6.2 Control messages .............................................................................................................................................67

6.3 Local/Remote command ...................................................................................................................................68
6.4 Commands by keyboard ....................................................................................................................................68
6.5 Power supply supervision ..................................................................................................................................69
6.6 External power supply supervision ......................................................................................................................69
6.7 Temperature supervision ...................................................................................................................................69
7. OPERATION MODE ................................................................................................................................................70
7.1 Through keyboard/display..................................................................................................................................70
7.1.1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................70
7.1.2 Elements of the keyboard /display unit ...................................................................................................... 70
7.1.3 Operating mode ......................................................................................................................................71
7.2 Using the PC ...................................................................................................................................................73
8. RECEPTION, STORAGE, INSTALLATION AND TESTS ................................................................................................ 74
8.1 Reception and storage ......................................................................................................................................74
8.2 Connecting procedure .......................................................................................................................................74
8.3 Unit addressing ...............................................................................................................................................75
8.4 Commissioning ................................................................................................................................................75
APPENDIX I. DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT CALCULATION .......................................................................................... 76
I.1. 2-winding models ............................................................................................................................................77
I.2. 3-winding models ............................................................................................................................................78
APPENDIX II. GENERATOR PROTECTION ............................................................................................................... 82
APPENDIX III. KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY .......................................................................................................................84
APPENDIX IV. CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................................................... 111
IV.1. Curves CEI 255-4./.BS142 ........................................................................................................................... 111
IV.2. ANSI Curves ................................................................................................................................................ 124
IV.3. User curves ................................................................................................................................................. 133
APPENDIX V. LIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS......................................................................................................... 135
V.1. Digital signals ............................................................................................................................................... 135
V.2. Measurements .............................................................................................................................................. 139
V.3. Commands ................................................................................................................................................... 140
APPENDIX VI. LOGIC DIAGRAMS .......................................................................................................................... 142
APPENDIX VII. DNP 3.0 RTU PROTOCOL ............................................................................................................... 154
VII.1. Settings ..................................................................................................................................................... 154
VII.2. Operation indications .................................................................................................................................. 156
VII.2.1 Spontaneous message indicating RESTART ........................................................................................... 156
VII.2.2 Synchronization .................................................................................................................................. 156
VII.2.3 Treatment and detection of digital changes ............................................................................................ 156
VII.2.4 Transfer of spontaneous messages ........................................................................................................ 156
VII.2.5 Particular aspects of the operation ........................................................................................................ 156
VII.3. Device Profile Document .............................................................................................................................. 157
VII.4. Implementation table .................................................................................................................................. 158
VII.5. Signal lists ................................................................................................................................................. 160
VII.5.1 Digital signals ..................................................................................................................................... 160
VII.5.2 Analogue measurements ...................................................................................................................... 160
VII.5.3 Commands ......................................................................................................................................... 160
APPENDIX VIII. MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL ......................................................................................................... 161
VIII.1. Protocol characteristics .............................................................................................................................. 161
VIII.1.1 Messages format ................................................................................................................................ 161
VIII.1.2 MODBUS Functions ........................................................................................................................... 161
VIII.1.3 Message examples ............................................................................................................................. 162
VIII.1.4 Unit status request............................................................................................................................. 165
VIII.1.5 Change request of digital signals ......................................................................................................... 166
VIII.1.6 Data request by user map ................................................................................................................... 167
VIII.1.7 Synchronization ................................................................................................................................. 167
VIII.1.8 Commands execution ......................................................................................................................... 168
VIII.1.9 Error codes ........................................................................................................................................ 168
VIII.2. Parameters ................................................................................................................................................ 168

PD300 User Manual V
INDEX 
VIII.3. Unit addresses map ................................................................................................................................... 169

VIII.4. Data formats.............................................................................................................................................. 170
APPENDIX IX. IEC 870-5-101 RTU PROTOCOL...................................................................................................... 173
IX.1. Settings ...................................................................................................................................................... 173
IX.2. Tables ......................................................................................................................................................... 176
IX.3. Interoperability profile IEC 870 – 5 – 101 ...................................................................................................... 179
IX.3.1 System or device (specific parameter of the system) ................................................................................ 179
IX.3.2 System configuration (system specific parameter).................................................................................... 179
IX.3.3 Physical layer (system specific parameter) .............................................................................................. 179
IX.3.4 Link layer (system specific parameter) .................................................................................................... 180
IX.3.5 Application layer .................................................................................................................................. 181
IX.3.6 Application basic functions ................................................................................................................... 185
APPENDIX X. IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL ......................................................................................................... 188
X.1. 870-5-103 Communication Protocol Function ................................................................................................. 188
X.2. Settings ....................................................................................................................................................... 189
X.3. Control signals .............................................................................................................................................. 190
X.4. Control analogue measurements...................................................................................................................... 190
X.5. Commands ................................................................................................................................................... 190
APPENDIX XI. IEC 61850 PROTOCOL ................................................................................................................... 191
XI.1. Introduction................................................................................................................................................. 191
XI.2. Previous steps to configure the device ............................................................................................................ 192
XI.2.1 IED Import to project ............................................................................................................................ 193
XI.3. Protection Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 194
XI.3.1 IED Properties ..................................................................................................................................... 194
XI.3.2 Communications .................................................................................................................................. 194
XI.3.3 Datasets .............................................................................................................................................. 196
XI.3.4 Report Control Blocks (RCB) ................................................................................................................. 198
XI.3.5 Goose Control Blocks (GOCB) ................................................................................................................ 198
XI.3.6 Goose Subscription............................................................................................................................... 199
XI.3.7 Settings .............................................................................................................................................. 200
XI.3.8 Commands .......................................................................................................................................... 200
XI.3.9 Private parts ........................................................................................................................................ 201
XI.4. Protection update ......................................................................................................................................... 202
APPENDIX XII. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................................... 203
XII.1. Failure detection ......................................................................................................................................... 203
XII.2. Error handling procedure ............................................................................................................................. 204
APPENDIX XIII. RECEPTION TESTS ................................................................................................................... 205
XIII.1. Material needed ......................................................................................................................................... 205
XIII.2. Measurement tests ..................................................................................................................................... 205
XIII.2.1 Measurements in display .................................................................................................................... 205
XIII.2.2 Measurements in Console ................................................................................................................... 205
XIII.3. Protection functions ................................................................................................................................... 205
XIII.3.1 Hardware status ................................................................................................................................. 205
XIII.3.2 Instantaneous units (current, voltage, frequency)................................................................................... 206
XIII.3.3 Timed units (current, voltage).............................................................................................................. 206
XIII.3.4 Current unbalance units...................................................................................................................... 207
XIII.3.5 Residual current units ........................................................................................................................ 208
XIII.4. Coil supervision ......................................................................................................................................... 208
XIII.5. Display and clock test ................................................................................................................................ 209
XIII.6. Unit time setting ........................................................................................................................................ 209

PD300 User Manual VI
GENERAL DESCRIPTION 
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The PD 300 family units are multifunctional protection relays of digital technology and they create the basic element used for the
protection, measurement and control for 2 and 3 winding transformers and generator (see appendix). They can be used as
autonomous elements for protection, control and measurement of an electrical bay or they can be integrated inside a Protection
and Control Integrated System.
Inside this family there are different models, which only differ in some hardware points or in its functionality. The Firmware is
common for all the models and the available functions are defined in a programmable logic circuit (PLD) The Firmware can be
load in the unit through the serial port, which makes the version updating easier.
1.1 MANUAL SCOPE

This manual does not correspond to a particular PD300 model, but it refers to the whole family. For each model, it will be
only applied anything related to its physical characteristics and its functionalities. This manual is divided into two sections;
the first one has the information related to configuration, functions and the second one has the appendixes: curves for timed
function operation, communication protocols, and structure of the keyboard/display menus.
On the other hand, each unit is delivered with a summarized “Characteristic Sheet” in which the functions of that model are
related to its connections diagram.
1.2 FUNCTIONS
Standard functions
Percent differential protection (87) with harmonic restraint (cross-blocking)
Instantaneous differential protection (87)
Three-phase overcurrent protection (50/51, with two instantaneous levels)
Residual overcurrent protection (50N/51N, with two instantaneous levels)
Unbalance protection in phase currents (46)
Breaker failure protection (50BF)
Thermal overload (49)
5th harmonic overexcitation protection (24 5th harmonic)
Breaker supervision
Closing and trip circuit supervision
Functions 2 winding model and generator

Earth-wired overcurrent protection (50G/51G, with two instantaneous levels)
Restricted earth protection (87G)
Frequency protection (5 steps): maximum (81M), minimum (81m)
Overvoltage protection (59)
Undervoltage protection (27)
Overexcitation protection V/f (24 V/Hz)
Functions only in generator

Percent and instantaneous differential protection limited by the frequency range (±5Hz)
Percent differential protection without harmonic restraints
Restricted earth protection (87G)
Only Yy connections with schedule time zero.
Measurements

PD300 User Manual 7
Phase currents measurements

Earthed measurement (2 winding model and generator)
Phase to earth voltage measurements (2 winding model and generator)
Current maximeter
Data acquisition
Chronological events recording
Chronological faults recording
Maximum and minimum measurement historical recording
Oscillograph data recorder
Other characteristics
Tables of Settings. Except for configuration, which has only one table, there are 6 tables of different settings for the
different groups, one of which is the active or working table at a given moment. The active table selection can be done
either via command by means of the keyboard/display (in "Settings (change)") or via command by means of a message
from the protection Console, or by activating the digital input

PD300 User Manual 8
1.3 MODEL CODING

Inside the PD300 protection family the following models are defined:
3 winding
87 + 50 + 51 + 50N + 51N + 46 + 50BF + 49 + 24 5th harmonic
2 winding
87 + 87G + 50 + 51 + 50N + 51N + 50G + 51G + 46 + 50BF + 49 + 24 5th
harmonic + 81M/m + 59 + 24V/Hz
Generator
87 + 87G 50 + 51 + 50N + 51N + 50G + 51G + 46 + 50BF + 49 + 24 5th
harmonic + 81M/m + 59 + 24V/Hz. Function 87 is filtered by frequency and
it does not have harmonic restraint.
Coding:

PD300 User Manual 9
Transformer location
2 winding model 3 winding model
T1 Ia winding 1 Ia winding 1
T2 Ib winding 1 Ib winding 1
T3 Ic winding 1 Ic winding 1
T4 IG1 Ia winding 2
T5 IG2 Ib winding 2
T6 Ia winding 2 Ic winding 2
T7 Ib winding 2 Ia winding 3
T8 Ic winding 2 Ib winding 3
T9 V Ic winding 3
See the examples about the transformer location in the connection diagrams
1.4 USER INTERFACE

Local. It incorporates a front panel with
16 key keyboard
A 2 line, 16 character display
7 red LED indicators and another one green/red
Connection via RS232 for direct connection to PC. Procome protocol
Remote. Depending on the model, it incorporates, on the rear plate, one or two glass Fibre Optic interfaces (ST type
connector), plastic Fibre Optic, RS232 or RS485 for connecting to a PC, modem or Substation Control Unit (in Integrated
Systems). The protocol can be Procome, DNP3.0, MODBUS, IEC 870-5-101 (except with RS485) or IEC 870-5-103.
Ethernet communication (RJ45, GFO)
It is only applied in those models equipped with an Ethernet port
- PROCOME encapsulated
- Peer to peer communications.
- 61850
IEC 61850 communication options
- Single RJ45 Ethernet
- Single FOC Ethernet
- Double GFO Ethernet redundancy
For serial communication these IEC 61850 models (R-type box) include:
- 1 RS232 port Procome protocol
- 1 GFO (unique option in case of double GFO Ethernet) or RS485 protocol DNP3.0.
1.5 HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS

The Hardware possibilities that define a specific model are the following:
Box type
Horizontal
Vertical
Terminal type
Pin type
For closed terminal

PD300 User Manual 10
Terminals:
Torque of terminals mounted on the rear panel.
Supply terminals
Minimum: 0.5 Nm (5 in-lb)
Maximum: 0.8 Nm (7 in-lb)
I/O terminals:
Current and voltage terminals (plug-in connector)
Current and voltage terminals (closed terminals)
Terminal wiring
The terminal cables must be made of single-section copper AWG 12 to 18 (4 mm2 to 0.8mm2)
Supply terminals
Section AWG 16 to 14 cables (1.5 to 2 mm2)
I/O terminals:
Section AWG 16 to 14 cables (1.5 to 2 mm2)
Current and voltage terminals
Section AWG 12 cables (4 mm2)
Power supply nominal voltage

125 / 220 Vcc
24 / 48 Vcc
*For more details see 2.8.1.Auxiliary power supply voltaje section.
Current transformer measurement range
Extended (low): 18 up to 160 Vdc
Extended (high): 86 up to 280 Vdc
Restricted 24 Vdc: 18 up to 34 Vdc
Number of digital inputs/outputs

Standard:
8 inputs (5 independent, 3 with a common point)
7 outputs (4 independent, 3 with a common point)
Extended: adds to the standard
9 inputs (6 independent, 3 with a common point)
7 outputs (4 independent, 3 with a common point)
Rear communication
Glass Optical Fiber (GOF)

GOF + GOF
RS485 + RS232
GOF + Ethernet (RJ45)
Plastic Optcical Fiber (POF)
POF + F POF
Internal Communication for TCP
GOF + Ethernet (OF)
RS232
FOC + RS232
RS232 + Ethernet (RJ45)
RS485
RS232 + RS232
RS485 + Ethernet (RJ45)
In case of having two rear ports, the one mentioned in second place is in parallel with the front RS232 (they occupy the same
port), except if one of the ports is Ethernet.
Analogue inputs
The unit can have up to 9 analogue inputs (through the transformer). The usage of each input is shown in the transformer
location table.
Measurement range of the current transformers

Model 2/3 windings Generratorr
In = 5 A 0,1A to 160A 0,02A to 32A
In = 1 A 0,02A to 32A
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Operating temperature -10 to 55 ºC
Storage temperature -40 to 85 ºC
Relative humidity up to 95% without condensation
1.7 TESTS
1.7.1 Electrical tests

Measurement of dielectric rigidity s/ IEC255-5, series C (2 kV, 1 minute)
Measurement of insulation resistance s/ IEC 255-5, > 10 Gigaohms at 500 Vdc
Pulse (shock wave) s/ IEC -255-4, appendix E., class III
HF disturbances s/ IEC -255-22-1, class III
Fast transients(burst) s/ IEC 61000-4-4 class IV
Electrostatic discharges s/ IEC 61000-4-2 class IV
Voltage pulses s/ IEC 61000-4-5 class IV
Micro-cuts s/ IEC 60870-2-1 100ms at 110 Vdc
Radiated electromagnetic interference s/ EN 61000-6-4
Immunity to radiated fields s/ IEC 61000-4-3, class III
Immunity to conducted radiofrequency signals s/ IEC 61000-4-6, class III
Immunity to low frequency magnetic field s/ IEC 61000-4-8

1.7.2 Environmental tests

Cold s/ IEC 68-2-1 (-40ºC)
Dry heat s/ IEC 68-2-2 (+85ºC)
Humid heat s/ IEC 68-2-3 (+70ºC, 93% relative humidity)
Change of temperature s/ IEC 68-2-14 (-20º/70ºC 2 4-hour-cycles)
Operating range -10ºC. up to 55º
1.7.3 Mechanical tests

Vibration test s/ IEC 255-21-1 class I
Shock and bump test s/ IEC 255-21-1 class I

1.8 WIRING DIAGRAMS

In all of the following diagrams only one of the possible digital inputs and outputs programming (very easy) is shown. See the
possibilities in the section “input programming” and “Output programming”
The order of the phase sequence is programmable via keyboard/display (See “Other settings”- “Define protection").
Wiring diagram example.
Pin-type 2-winding models

Closed-type 2-winding models

Pin-type 3-winding models

Closed-type 3-winding models

Pin type generator winding models

Wiring diagram example
Closed type generator winding models

Block diagrams

1.9 ACCURACY
Accuracy (permanent status)
Overcurrent units
Pickup and restoration of phases and neutral ±3% of the theoretical value or 20mA (the greater of boths)
Time measurement
Accuracy of ±5% of the setting or 50ms (the greater of both)
Differential units
Pickup and restoration ±5% of the theoretical value or 50mA (the greater of both)
Accuracy in the range 47Hz to 51Hz
Repetitiveness
3% of the operation time or 40ms (the greater of both)
Transitory overreach
<15% for totally inductive lines (typical <10%)
<5% for lines with impedance angle of 70º o or less
Transitory overreach = (Inodc – Imaxdc)/ Inodc x100
being:
Inodc = pickup value for current without dc component

Imaxdc = pickup value for current with maximum offset dc
1.9.1 Trafos saturation

In order to assure the working of the CTs, the maximum current of symmetric external fault in the secondary multiplied by
the total load of the secondary ohms, must be below the half of the secondary rated current of the transformer (class of
the CT according to IEEE C57.13).
We must check if the secondary currents of the CT during the maximum symmetric external faults, do not exceed the
maximum allowed current in the trafo, typical of 20xIn.

HARDWARE 
2. HARDWARE
2.1 CONSTRUCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS. HORIZONTAL BOX (PD300H)

Unit’s external dimensions
2.2 CONSTRUCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS. VERTICAL BOX (PD300V)

2.3 CONSTRUCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS. TCP MOUNTED


HARDWARE 
2.4 REAR TERMINALS

In the following pictures are showed several models according to its configuration.
In models without inputs and output extensión, there are not the upper connectors: terminals 17 to 32 of X1 connector and
terminals 14 to 28 of X2 connector.
2 and 3 winding model (all for pin type terminals)
2 winding model with closed type terminals for analogue inputs

HARDWARE 
3 winding model with closed type terminals for analogue inputs
2.5 OPTIONS FOR REAR COMMUNICATIONS PORTS:

Single port
OF (Glass or PLastic) RS232 RS485
Double port
OF + OF OF+RS232 RS485+RS232 RS232+RS232 Ethernet+OF Ethernet+RS485 Ethernet+RS232

HARDWARE 
2.6 RS485 CONNECTION DETAIL BETWEEN SOME UNITS
Although there is an internal connection in the unit between 1 and 2 pin and between pin number 3 and 4, if a connection is
done on the bus side, as it is shown in the figure, a unit can be removed without causing a loss in the chain continuity.
2.7 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION
2.7.1 Ethernet by GOF

The characteristics of the optical channels are as follows:
Baud rate: 100Mb
Connector: ST
Optical transmitter: LED
Optical receiver: PIN Photodiode
Optical output: Without modulating.
Work wave length: Glass λc = 1300nm
BER δ10-9.
Multimode glass optical fiber: 62.5/125µm.

HARDWARE 
The values consider the temperature range from –20ºC to +85ºC.

Losses depending on the Fibre type.
Max. allowed losses Losses Km Connection losses
Glass 62.5/125µm 8 db 4 db 0.5 db
The transmission maximum distance is given by:
PP − PC − ME
l=
∆
PP= Losses allowed in the link
PC= Inset losses of additional connections
ME= Aging margin. 3 db must be considered
∆= Cable loss in db/Km
Reachable maximum distance:

Under the worst conditions In the best conditions
Glass 62.5/125µm 1.25 Km 2 Km
2.7.2 Ethernet through RJ45 cable

Interface through isolated transformer of 600 impedance ohms
Insulation 500 V
Connector RJ45 (female)
Baud rate: 10/100 Mb.
Cable type: Shielded
Cable length: 100 m max
2.8 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
2.8.1 Auxiliary power supply voltage

Power supply technical data:
Auxiliary power supply
24-48 Vdc
Range 18-60 Vdc
Ripple 20 % over the rated current
110-125-220 Vdc
Range 86-280 Vdc
Ripple 20% over the rated current
Burden 8W min/ 18W max
The units have been designed to be installed and run in environments equipped with a safe and stable direct current
supply. The switched, high-capacity power supplies can be used with alternating current within the following limits:
From 18 to 60 Vdc peak values for the 24-48 VDC supply, equivalent to an operating range of 14 Vac to 42
Vac RMS approximately.
From 18 to 280 Vdc peak values for the 110-125-200 VDC supply, equivalent to an operating range of 70 Vac
to 195 Vac RMS approximately.
These units’ digital inputs are designed to pick up signals in direct current and within specified ranges

HARDWARE 
The digital outputs can operate both in DC and in AC power supply systems.
The units have been tested and certified to IEC standards for installation and operation in direct current systems. They
have not been tested to AC equipment standards.
2.8.2 Output contacts

Relays 1-6 and 8-13 Relays 7 and 14
Carry (permanent) at 25 ºC 5A 5A
Make(0.5 s) 30 A 30 A
Breaking capacity (resistive load)
for 220 Vcc 0.4 A 0.15 A
for 125 Vcc 1A 0.4 A
for 48 Vcc 3A 2A
Breaking capacity (L/R=40 ms)
for 220 Vcc 0.2 A 0.1 A
for 125 Vcc 0.5 A 0.3 A
for 48 Vcc 0.5 A 0.5 A
2.8.3 Digital inputs (optoisolated)

Burden: < 3 mA
Extended range Restricted range

Model High Low 24 Vdc 48 Vdc 125 Vdc 220 Vdc
Operating range (Vdc) 86 to 280 18 to 160 18 ato34 36 ato60 85 to 150 65 to 264
Inactive below (Vdc) 60 15 15 26 60 110
2.8.4 IRIG-B input

Characteristics
Demodulated input, TTL level
Type of cable: 2 shielded wires
Isolation: 500 V

HARDWARE 
Connections
The input circuit is a 390 ohm serial resistance with an optoacoplator; for a 5 V signal, the approximate burden is 10 mA
The number of units that can be connected in parallel to a generator, depends on its capacity to supply output current; a
typical value can be 70 mA, so 6 units could be connected (although the wire length and type have influence. The wire
must be twisted and screened.
2.8.5 Phase and neutral current circuits (rated current 1/5 A)

Thermal capacity
Continuous 20 A
For 1 second 500 A
For half cycle 1250 A
Burden for In = 5 A <0.35VA
Burden for In = 1 A 0.02VA
2.8.6 Voltage circuits

Thermal capacity
Continuous 2 Un
For 1 second 5 Un (1 sec.)
3.5 Un (1 min)
Burden for 63.5 V 0.015 VA
Burden for 100 V 0.27 VA

HARDWARE 
2.9 OPERATING FREQUENCY

Rated: 50 or 60 Hz (programmable). Operating range: fn ± 5 Hz
2.10 PHASE ORDER

ABC or CBA (programmable)

UNIT CONFIGURATION 
3. UNIT CONFIGURATION
The settings that are defined next configure the unit, so they are basic.
Some of them are only accessible by keyboard/display; some others are also accessible by Console
All of them are usually of single table (Table 0). By keyboard/display you access to the programming of the table 0 through the menu
“Settings (change)” by means of the keys ↑↑↓↓.
The differential protection generals are of 6 tables. By keyboard/display you access through the table programming.
3.1 PROGRAMMING OF DIGITAL AND LOGICAL INPUTS

In this kind of units, two types of inputs vare considered: digital inputs (physical, wired in the fields) or logicals (internals). Each
possible input function (for example “breaker status)can only be programmed only either as digital or logical, but never both at
the same time.
The digital input programming is as follows:
It is carried out through the console, in the “Configuration of digital inputs” screen, in the right upper chart.
By keyboard/display: PROG. TABLE 0 - PROG.CONFIG – CONFIG. INPUTS
SELECC. N0/NC
INPUTS ACTIV. T.
CONFIG INPUTS allows programming a digital input among the following possibilities:
Breaker status (general and for each breaker)

Close command (general and for each breaker)
Open command (general and for each breaker)
External protection (general and for each breaker)
Close unblocking
Set table 1. If a pulse is received, it sets the settings table 1 as the active table
Set Local/Remote command
Close circuit supervision with 52 open (2 or 3 breakers depending on the model)
Close circuit supervision with 52 closed ( 2 or 3 breakers depending on the model)
Trip circuit supervision with 52 open( 2 or 3 breakers depending on the model)
Trip circuit supervision with 52 closed ( 2 or 3 breakers depending on the model)
Local reposition. It turns off the tripping LEDs and it is equal to recognition for Keyboard/display.
Output reposition. It deactivates the relays programmed as “Memorized”.
Relay locking. When activating it set the relay out of service, but when it is deactivate the relay state will be the
corresponding to the setting “In service”.
Instantaneous inhibition. It locks the trips of the instantaneous overcurrent units, but it allows the pick up
Instantaneous inhibition winding 1, 2 or 3. It locks the trips of the instantaneous overcurrent units on the indicated winding,
but it allows the pick up.

Neutral inhibition 1 or 2. It locks the trips of the instantaneous overcurrent units on the indicated neutral, but it allows the
pick up.
Free. The input may be used by the protection for lock out or logical, or it may not be used. In any case, its state may be
transmitted to control.
It should not be programmed more than an input with a certain function.
SELECC. NO/NC. It defines if the input must be interpreted like active when it is viewed closed or when it is viewed open.
Regardless it has been selected NO/NC, the digital inputs programmed in outputs, logics,leds, state signalling are seen at 1
when there is voltage in the input, and at 0 when there is no voltage in the input.
For example, for the status of the circuit breaker, if we use a contact 52a we should program the corresponding input as NO
(when it closes it will indicate closed circuit breaker), while if we use a 52b we should program it as NC (when it opens it will
indicate closed circuit breaker).
INPUT ACTIV. T. (time of activation of inputs). It is a software filter for the activation / deactivation of digital inputs. The HW
filters is of 1 to 2 ms, and it can be extended by software in the number of programmed milliseconds (range 0 to 20 ms.
The programming of digital inputs is the following one:
It is carried out through the console, in the “Configuration of digital inputs” screen, in the right lower chart.
A logical input is a virtual input(not physical)the state of which depends on the corresponding digital signal( input 1
corresponds to logical signal 1, input 15, to signal 15. its function is the one programmed( the possibilities of programming
are the same as the ones of the digital inputs).
This procedure allows the assignation of relay internal signals to those inputs as if they were wired field signals. Up to 15
logical inputs are allowed( because there are 15 logical signals).
NO/NC selection,active input when the logic is active or inactive.
Delay is not applied to the activation.
Example: if logical input 3 is programmed as “breaker state” and NO, the unit will consider that the breaker is closed, when
logical sign is inactive.
A certain function must only be programmed as one input. It is not admissible, for example, to program “state of the breaker”
as a digital input and as a logical input.
3.2 FLICKER TREATMENT IN THE DIGITAL INPUTS

The flicker or bouncing consists of the quick and continuous change of a digital input, usually associated to a failure in the
input contact. This function allows carrying out a control to disable the inputs or digital signals that blinks so as not to interfere
in the system integrated in the control, because when a digital signal is disabled, it does not generate any state change.
This function has 3 settings:
Minimum number of changes to mark NFLICKER fault: Minimum number of changes of a signal that must occur in
TFLICKER seconds (parameter) to consider that the contact is faulty and that this signal is disabled (the changes are not
treated and its state is not refreshed). Value between 0 and 255. Value 0 inhibites the signal disabling treatment due to
blinking.
Minimum number of changes to remove the QFLICKER default mark: Maximum number of changes of a signal that must
occur in TFLICKER seconds (parameter) to consider that the contact is not faulty and that the signal previously disabled is
enabled. Value between 0 and 255. Value 0 inhibites the signal automatic enabling treatment when theblinking
disappears.
Default decision interval (TFLICKER): time nterval, in seconds, for the tretament of the disabling or enabling of the digital
signals by blinking. Value between 1 and 60. If a digital input changes its state more than NFLICKER times in a time of
TFLICKER seconds (parameter) this input is disabled. If the NFLICKER paramater has a value 0, the blinking control is
not carried out.
Once a number of changes higher than the one programmed is detected, the signal is set as invalid, a Procome change is
generated indicating the change into invalid and, from this moment on, changes in this signals are not detected.

For the subsequent enabling of the disabled digital signals, there are three options:
Manual reset manual of the unit.

Automatic enabling: if a digital input previously disabled changes its state less than QFLICKER times in a time of TFLICKER
seconds, this input is enabled. If the QFLICKER paramater has a value 0, the automatic enabling of the digital outputsl is
not carried out.
Enabling by operator’s command :Default order or programmed by the user (generic order that can be sent from the console or
telecommnad) through which the unit is indicated to enable all the digital inputs that were disabled. The order only
provoques the enabling of the disabled digital inputs without having influence in the blinking treatment, that is, if, after
the order, input blinking is detected, they get disabled again.
3.3 PROGRAMMING OF DIGITAL OUTPUTS

By console it is carried out in the screen “Digital outputs configuration”.
By keyboard/display: PROG. TABLE 0 - PROG.CONFIG – PROG. OUTPUTS
OUTPUT ACTIV. T.
The functionality of each digital output can be programmed like an OR of the logical signals available in this unit (see point “List
of available signals”, in the appendixes.)
In the programming through Console (recommended), for each digital output it is clicked with the mouse in the cells
corresponding to the signs whose OR wants to be activated by the output. (Matrix programming).
In the programming screen, at he end of the available signal list, there is a row with the title “OTPUT TYPE”, in which each
output is defined as “Trip”, “T1”, “T2” , “T3”, “Close”, “C1”, “C2” , “C3”, “Memorized” or “Nothing”. The operation
depending on the output type:
If it is of the type “trip” the output carries out the sealing logic( if the sealing setting is set to yes) and that of opening failure
of 2 or 3 breakers (depending on the model).
If it is of the type “T1”, “T2”, “T3” the output carries out the sealing logic (if the sealing setting is set to yes) and that of the
open failure of the specified breaker.
If it is of the type “Close” the output carries out the sealing logic( if the sealing setting is set to yes) and that of opening
failure of 2 or 3 breakers (depending on the model).
If it is of the type “C1”, “C2” o “C3 the output carries out the sealing logic (if the sealing setting is set to yes) and that of the
open failure of the specified breaker.
If it is “Memorized”, once it has been activated, it can only be deactivated by a digital input programmed as “output”.
If it is set to “nothing” it does nothing special
The output activation time defines the minimum operation time of each physical output, once it has been activated (in seconds).
The range is from 0.05 to5 seconds. It appears in the last row of the screen.
Through keyboard it is more difficult. In PROG OUTPUTS, we can find “ASSIGN SIGNALS” for each of them with the following
possibilities:
NO SIGNAL (the output remains without assigning, but it can be activated by control commands)
SAME SIGNALS (it is not wished to change the current programming)
OTHER SIGNALS (it is wished to change the current programming). When pushing “↵” (Intro), it is gone through the logical
signals with the arrow ↓; when we arrive to a signal that we want to use in the OR that defines the output, we press “R”; when we
finish with the signals, we pulse “↵”, which takes us to the programming of the output type, with the possibilities already
indicated.

3.4 PROGRAMMING OF LEDS

Through Console, it is carried out in the screen “LEDs programming”
By keyboard/display: PROG. TABLE 0 - PROG.CONFIG – PROG. LEDs
OUTPUT ACTIV. T.
The proceedings are totally analogous to the programming of digital outputs, except that the activation time is not programmed
and that the possible types are “Memorized” and “Non memorized”. The non-memorized turns off when the cause for turning on
disappears; to turn off the memorized a “Fault acknowledgement” must be done either by keyboard/display or digital input.
3.5 PROGRAMMING OF LOGIC OUTPUTS

The user can configure up to 15 logic outputs, called “logic 1” to “logic 15” and they can be assigned to output relays, LEDs,
locked inputs, signals to be registered in the oscillograph data recorder , etc…
The logic output programming can be only carried out through the protection Console, (and not through keyboard/display) from he
available basic signals which are detailed in the Appendix “Available signals” (as many of them corresponds to optional
functions, all the models do not have all these functions) The programming procedure is described in another document:
“Protection Console Manual”
Logic signals are generated in accordance with the following layout:
As it can be seen, defining a logic output involves the following:
up to 16 of the available signals (or their negations), forming an OR function

up to 16 of the available signals (or their negations), forming an AND function
An OR or AND function is programmable from the results of the two foregoing functions.
A programmable delay for the activation of the output.
A programmable duration for the activation of the output
The delay is the time elapsed from the moment there is 1 logic at the output of the logic ports and the moment when the relevant
logic output activates. If “1” disappears during that time, the signal does not activate. It can be programmed from 0 to 599.9
sec., in 0.1 sec. steps.
The pulse time (duration) is the time for which the logic signal remains active. It can be programmed in two ways:
"By logic": after the delay, the output remains active as long as there is a 1 at the output of the programmed logic.
"By time": the time is programmed for which the output must remain active, and after that time it de-activates regardless of
the status of the programmed logic output. Only another move there from 0 to 1 will re-activate the output, once the delay
has elapsed.
This time can range from 0.1 to 599.9 seconds, with 0.1 sec. steps.
A logic output “i” can be used as available signal for another logic signal programming input “j” or for itself.

Simple example of application: Digital output DO7 is to be made to follow digital input DI6 with a 1 second delay.
Delay time = 1 sec.
Duration = "by logic"
SD7 digital output programming: logic 1
3.6 PROGRAMMING GENERAL SETTINGS

Relay on duty: it has to be set on YES for the protection to be completely operational. If it's set on NO the protection responds to
communications and the keyboard/display so that it can enter into operation; it also activates the relay and/or LED which has
been programmed as "Out of duty relay", deactivating all the rest.
Breaker number: this is an identification text. It may be programmed alphanumerically through communications, but only
numerically through the keyboard.
Setting Minimum Maximum Step Notes

Relay in service YES/NO
Breaker number 5 alfanum. Characters
3.7 DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION GENERAL SETTING PROGRAMMING

It has 6 setting tables:
Winding Transformation Ratio: it shows, in an independent way, the relations between each winding phase current:
transformer ratio. It is used in the differential and restricted earth protection.
Earthed transformation ratios: Only in 2 winding models and genrator: It shows in an independent way, the relations between
each earthed current transformers ratio. It is used in restricted earth.
Current transformation ratio: Only in 2 winding models: It is used only to give measurements regarding the primary.
Winding nominal voltage: (kV): it shows, in an independent way, each winding nominal voltage in k. It is used in the
differential protection.
Type of connection: It shows each winding type connection: star, delta or zigzag. In 3 winding models only star or delta
connection is allowed
Time code: It indicates each winding dephase regarding the primary winding
Application maximum: It shows in MVA the application power. It is used for the differential measurement calculation. If it is
set to 0, the valued indicated in the taps is used.
Winding tap: It is used for the differential measurement calculation, as long as the application maximum power is set to 0.

2/3 windings: In the 3 winding models it shows if the differential uses 2 or 3 windings
Nominal voltage in winding 1(kV) 1 1000 0.1
T i ratio in winding 1 1 10000 0.1
Type of connection in winding 1 Y/D
Time code 1-2 0 11 1
Time code 1-3 0 11 1
Enable function 86 YES/NO
IG 1 trafo ratio 1 10000 0.1
IG 2 trafo ratio 1 10000 0.1
Voltage trafo ratio 1 10000 0.1
Application maximum current (MVA) 0.2 5000 0.1
0.5 100 0.01 In = 5A
Winding tap 1
0.1 20 0.01 In = 1A
0.5 100 0.01 In = 5A
Winding tap 2
0.1 20 0.01 In = 1A
0.5 100 0.01 In = 5A
Winding tap 3
0.1 20 0.01 In = 1A
2/3 winding differential 2wind/3wind
Note: In case of obtaining the winding tap by calculation (see appendix), the obtained result must be between the indicated limits for the tap, according the In
calibre (0.5 to 100A for In=5A and 0.1 to 20 for In=1A); in case the result is higher than the maximum it will be fixed in the maximum, but if it is lower than the
minimum, it will be fixed in the minimum.
3.8 COMMUNICATION CONFIGURATION
3.8.1 Front door Communication (Port 1_1) and rear port no. 2 (Port 1_2)
“PD300 unit has its own address identifying number, which makes possible identify the messages sent to the unit from
the PC through its front port ( or rear port) with protocol PROCOME. This address is programmable from the
keyboard/display entering “CHANGE SETTINS”, "PROG. TABLE 0", "COMUNICAT.", “FRONT PORT”, “UCL ADDRESS".
The units leave the factory with the address 4. This number is the one used in de Engineering program when defining the
installation.
If for any reason this number is changed in Engineering, the address programming has to be changed and vice versa.
If a PD300 unit is replaced by another one, the installed unit must have the same address as the removed one.
The baud rate, parity and the number of STOP bits can also be programmed in the "COMUNICAT ". The units leave the
factory at 19200 baud, even parity and 1 bit of Stop.
The established communication setting can be viewed on display, by entering ”SETTINGS (see)”, SEE TABLE 0”,
COMMUNICAT”, “PORT COM1”..
3.8.2 Communication via rear port nº 1 (Port 2)

The protocol type to be used by this port is defined in “SETTINGS (change)”, “PROG. TABLE 0”, “COMMUNIC.”,
“SELEC. COMMUN.COM2”. The options are: Procome, DNP, MODBUS, IEC870-5-101 (not valid for RS485) or IEC870-
5-103.
In DNP, MODBUS, IEC870-5-101 protocols, a digital signal “Control RTS” is available, which is activated during the data
transmission from the protection.

Procome
If the option chosen is Procome, in “SETTINGS (change)”, “PROG. TABLE 0”, “COMMUNIC.” “PORT COM2”, a settings
group is programmed (it is not necessary that they have the same values) which is analogous to the one defining the front
port, but, besides, there is another setting” CONTROL SIGNALS”, with the options “None” and “RTS”; this setting also
affects the port COM1.
DNP
If the option chosen is DNP, the address is programmable from the keyboard/display, entering “SETTINGS (change)”,
“PROG. TABLE 0”, “COMMUNIC” “PORT COM2”, “CONFIG.DNP”, “LCU ADDRESS”. This address does not need to be
the same as the one of the front port, but it is convenient to avoid confusions. The units leave the factory with the address
and the rest of DNP parameters without being programmed. They have to be programmed by the user.
If a replacement of the PD300 unit by other is made, the installed unit must have the same address as the one removed.
The unit also has an identification number of the Master unit it is connected to, and which only accepts messages coming
from there. It is also programmable in the unit within the “CONFIG. DNP”. The units leave the factory with the address 0.
They are also programmable the baud rate, the parity and the number of STOP bits. The units leave the factory at 9600
baud, without parity, 1 Stop bit.
The established communication settings can be seen on the display, entering “SETTINGS (see)”, “SEE TABLE 0”,
“COMMUNICATIONS”, “PORT COM2”, “CONFIG. DNP”
The settings can be displayed/programmed both via keyboard/display and via PC with the Protection Console.
For more detail on communication DNP, see the corresponding Appendix.
MODBUS
If the chosen option is MODBUS, the address is programmable from the keyboard/display, entering “SETTINGS (change)”,
“PROG. TABLE 0”, “COMMUNICATIONS” “PORT COM2”, “CONFIG.MODBUS”, “LCU ADDRESS”. This address does not
need to be the same as the one of the front port, but it is convenient to avoid confusions. The units leave the factory with
the address and the rest of the MODBUS parameters without been programmed. They have to be programmed by the user.
If the PD300 unit is replaced by other, the installed unit must have the same address as the one removed.
They are also programmable the baud rate, the parity and the auxiliary timers for activation and deactivation of the RT
signal (internal).
The established communication settings can be seen on display, entering “SETTINGS (see)”, “SEE TABLE 0”,
“COMMUNICATIONS”, “PORT COM2”, “CONFIG. MODBUS”
For more detail on communication MODBUS, see the corresponding Appendix.
IEC 870-5-101
If the chosen option is 101, the address is programmable from the keyboard/display, entering “SETTINGS (change)”,
“PROG. TABLE 0”, “COMMUNICATIONS” “PORT COM2”, "GENERALS", "LINK ADDRESS" and “APPLIC ADDRESS”.
This address does not need to be the same as the one of the front port, but it is convenient to avoid confusions. The units
leave the factory with the address and the rest of the 101 parameters without been programmed. They have to be
programmed by the user.
If the PD300 unit is replaced by other, the installed unit must have the same address as the one removed.
signal (internal).
The established communication settings can be seen on display, entering “SETTINGS (see)”, “SEE TABLE 0”,
“COMMUNICATIONS”, “PORT COM2”, "GENERALS"
This protocol is not valid for RS485 ports. For more details on 101 communications, see the corresponding setting.
IEC 870-5-103

If the chosen option is 103, the address is programmable from the keyboard/display, entering “SETTINGS (change)”,
“PROG. TABLE 0”, “CONFIG. COMMUNICAT.”, “PORT COM2”, “LCU ADDRESS”. This address does not need to be the
same as the one of the front port, but it is convenient to avoid confusions. The units leave the factory with the address
and the rest of the 103 parameters without been programmed. They have to be programmed by the user.
If the PL300 unit is replaced by another one, the installed unit must have the same address as the one removed.
signal (internal).
The established communication settings can be seen on display, entering “SETTINGS (see)”, “SEE TABLE 0”, “CONFIG.
COMMUNICAT.”, “PORT COM2”.
Apart from the keyboard/display, the settings can also be displayed/programmed from the PC.
For more detail on 103 communication, see the corresponding Appendix.
3.8.3 Ethernet Communication

It is only applied in models with Ethernet port.
In order to configure the Ethernet port the fist parameter to be configured corresponds to the TCP/IP communication
selection. It is programmed from the keyboard/display, by entering "SETTINGS (change)", "PROG. TABLE 0",
"COMMUNICATIONS", “SELECT COM TCPIP”. The options of this parameter are: Procome and No. The operation
according to this parameter is as follows:
Procome: Through Ethernet port communication with Procome protocol is possible. In this case the selection of
Procome protocol in the other rear port (“com 2”) is not allowed. In short, through Ethernet port the
communication is with Procome protocol, whilst in the second rear port (if available) communication is carried out
through the selected protocol, except Procome.
NO. communication is not carried out through Ethernet port. In this case, the second rear port (if available)
communicates through the selected protocol, Procome is allowed.
The remaining configuration parameters of Ethernet port are configured with the Sipcon console, in the menu
“Configuration TCP/IP). These parameters are those below:
Generals
Protection IP address. It shows the protection IP address (server unit). They are 32 bits, in decimal notation separated
by dots.
Subnet mask. It defines which part of the IP address identified by the network. They are 32 bits, in decimal notation
separated by dots. All those IP addresses that do not fulfil the net mask, that is, those which do not have the part
of the net mask at 1 are not considered to belong to the net and they are not treated. For example, the mask
255.255.255.000 allows 256 server addresses that would share the first three values of the address.
Gateway. Link gate. It shows the IP address the messages will be sent to for those servers tat do not belong to the local
net. It will be the IP address of the unit in charge of carrying out the router functions of the net.
No. of connections. It is fixed at 1.
Procome
Master IP address. It shows the protection IP address (client unit).
Port. It shows the port to which the master unit is connected.
UCL Address. It is the protection address, to which the protocol responds.

3.9 OTHER CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

Only accessible by keyboard/display, on “SETTINGS (change)”, “PROG. TABLE 0”, “DEFINE PROTECT.”. They are the following:
3.9.1 Frequency
It can be 50 Hz or 60 Hz. It is the fundamental basic protection setting. If it is not the correct one, the measurements
and, therefore, the protection operation will be wrong.
3.9.2 Language
It can be English or Spanish. It relates to the texts shown on display.
3.9.3 Phase order

It can be A, B, C or C, B, A. It affects only to the protection functions of broken conductor and unbalance (currents and
voltages). To verify that the order corresponds to the wiring, check in “Measurements” that the ratio of the inverse/direct
component is close to 0%, when introducing 3 balanced currents of about 1 A.
3.9.4 Pushbuttons enabling and lockings by commands

Under the name “PUSHBUTTONS” there are two settings:
“ENAB. PUSHBUT” (Pushbuttons enabling ): If this setting is at “FUNCTIONALS”, they keys can be used to give
commands; if they are at “NO”, they cannot.
“ENAB. LOCK. COMMAND” (Enabling of locking/unlocking by commands): If this setting is at “YES”, the protection
function locking/unlocking control commands that have been programmed are enabled; if they are at “NO, they are
disabled.
3.9.5 Power supply supervision enabling

The power supply supervision can be or cannot be enabled. See section “Power supply supervision” for its operation.
3.9.6 External power supply supervision

Only available in those model with the option “Battery voltage measurement”. The three settings for this function, enable,
minimum threshold (V) and maximum threshold(V), are in this menu. See section “External power supply supervision” for
its operation.
3.9.7 Temperature supervision

The three settings for this function, enable, minimum threshold (º) and maximum threshold(º), are in this menu. See
section “temperature supervision” for its operation.
3.9.8 Calibration
This menu position is exclusively to be used by the Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution SA technicians, according to a
certain procedure. It should not be used by the user.

3.9.9 Display contrast setting

The procedure that should be followed is the following:
By the pressing key “●” (of a 16 key keyboard) for 3 to 5 seconds, you enter in the contrast setting menu, appearing
the text:” -DOWN +UP”.
With the keys “↑ ”and “↓ “ the contrast is adjusted. With “↑ “ more brightness is given and with “↓ “ it gets dark.
To validate, press “ ESC” or after a minute it goes back to the usual position, with the carried-out changes.

PROTECTION FUNCTIONS. DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS 
4. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS. DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
4.1 PROTECTION FUNCTION LOCKING

Each of the protection functions can be locked by a digital input or by a logic function (combination of inputs and/or control
signals). See “Programming logic signals” in the Configuration section
The locking programming is carried out through console and keyboard/display as any other setting inside the corresponding
function.
4.2 DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION

The differential protection will be in percent terms with harmonic restraint and instantaneous. The protection function is the
same for 2 and 3 winding, and the difference lays in the calculation of the differential current (see the corresponding appendix).
The settings corresponding to the differential currents (shown as xIn) are indicated in tap steps.
The differential protection generic curve is the following one:
Depending on the step and gradient current settings, different characteristics can be obtained, for example:

4.2.1 Percent characteristic

It matches the graphic section with the possibility of restraint. It can be double gradient or single gradient
The protection operation takes place when once the programmed time has elapsed, since the differential current is inside
the trip area with restraint possibility (see graph) and besides, the 2nd and 5th harmonic constituents do not cause
restraint.
The settings (6 tables) are:

Enable YES/NO
Sensitivity (xTap) 0.15 2 0.01 See note
I step 1 (xTap) 0 2 0.01
I step 2 (xTap) 0 20 0.01
α1 (%) 5 100 1
α2 (%) 5 200 1
Additional time (s) 0 60 0.01
Note: The sensitivity value must fulfil the following:

Tapmin imum ·Sensitivity ≥ 0.05·In
being In the rated current (5A or 1A). If not, the sensitivity value is automatically modified to fulfil it.
The sensitivity and step currents are shown in tap steps.
The settings are in the Console, in the “Differential Protection” screen.
4.2.2 Harmonic restraint
4.2.2.1 Inrush restraint

The protection differentiates the inrush currents by means of the differential current’s 2nd harmonic component
or 2nd + 4th of the differential current according the setting selection.
When the component of the 2nd or the 2nd + 4th harmonic of the differential current in one or more phases
exceed the set percent of the fundamental, the trip will be inhibited in that phase or in all of them, depending
on the selection.
In order to the harmonic restrain act, the differential current of the fundamental must exceed the set minimum
value set, so if it below that threshold, the harmonic restrain does not act.
Setting Magnitude Operation

No Idif_2 It does not inhibit in any phase
2nd PHASE Idif_2 It inhibits only in the phases exceeding the harmonic setting.
It inhibits in the three phases when any of them exceeds the
2nd GLOBAL Idif_2
harmonic setting.
2nd + 4th PHASE ( Idif _ 2) 2 + ( Idif _ 4) 2 It inhibits only in the phases exceeding the harmonic setting.
It inhibits in the three phases when any of them exceeds the
nd th
2 + 4 GLOBAL ( Idif _ 2) + ( Idif _ 4)
2 2
harmonic setting..
Being:
Idif_2: Idifferential 2nd harmonic
Idif_4: Idifferential 2nd harmonic

The settings (6 tables) are the following:
Setting Min
Max Step Notes
NO / 2nd PHASE / 2nd GLOBAL / 2nd +4th PHASE /
Enable 2nd harmonic restrain
2nd +4th GLOBAL
2nd harmonic restrain threshold (%) 5 100 1
Differential threshold (xTap) 0.15 1 0.01 See note
Note: The differential threshold must fulfil the following:
Tapmin imum ·Treshold ≥ 0.05·In
being In the rated current (5A or 1A). If not, the threshold value is automatically modified in order to fulfil it.
The setting are in the Console in the “Differential Protection” screen.
4.2.2.2 Overexcitation
The transformer overexcitation current is discriminated by means of the 5th harmonic.
When the 5th harmonic component of the differential current in one or more phases exceeds the basic set
percent the trip will be inhibited, according to its enabling:
NO: It does not inhibit in any phase

GLOBAL: It inhibits in the three phases
PHASE: It inhibits only in the phases that exceed the harmonic setting.
For the harmonic restraint to take place, the differential current of the first harmonic must be over the setting
minimum value, so if it is below that threshold the harmonic restraint does not act.
The settings (6 tables) are the following:
Setting Min. Max. Step Notes

5th harmonic restrain enable NO/GLOBAL/PHASE
5 th harmonic restraint threshold(%) 5 100 1
Differential threshold (Xtap) 0,15 1 0,01 See note
Note: The differential threshold must fulfil that:

Tapmin imum ·Treshold ≥ 0.05·In
being In the rated current (5A or 1A). If not, the threshold value is automatically modified in order to fulfil it.
The settings are in the Console, on the “Differential Protection” screen
4.2.3 Instantaneous differential

The relay trips once the programmed time since the differential current exceeds the programmed setting has passed. It
does not have harmonic restraint.
The setting (6 tables) are:
Settings Minimum Maximum Step Notes

Enable YES/NO
Trip (xTap) 1.0 20 0.01
Additional time(s) 0 60 0.01
The settings are in the Console, on the “Differential Protection” screen.

4.2.4 Function 86
It activates the relays programmed with this function when a trip by differential (instantaneous or percentual) occurs, for
being used as locking of the close circuits of the breakers. The only setting for this function is the enabling (”YES”,
enabled, “NO”, disabled).
The relays are deactivated by the actuation of the “Close unblocking” input, by pushing the “R” key or by command from
the console.
4.3 RESTRICTED EARTH PROTECTION

It is only available in 2 winding models and generator.
It has 2 independent units, which use IG1 and IG2 transformers. For each of them the winding can be programmable regarding
the one it is compared to or if it is an autotransformer
The settings are in the Console, in the “Differential Protection” screen:

Enable YES/NO
0.25 20 0.01 In = 5 A
Trip (A)
0.05 4 0.01 In = 1 A and Generator
Comparation winding Wind 1, Wind 2 or Autotrafo
In the case of genertaor, as trips can occur due to the saturation of the Tis, it is convenient to time the function with a time
higher than the one of the external fault clearing.
4.3.1 Winding 1/ Winding 2

The comparation winding setting must be “Winding1” or “Winding 2”.
This function is applicable when a winding is an earthed star and has a measurement current transformer in the earth-
wired. This function compares the winding current and the earth-wired trafo. The magnitude and the direction are
analysed.
Magnitude: If the difference between the residual and neutral current (algebraic sum), once applied their
corresponding transforming ratio, must exceed the programmed threshold.
RTI
⋅ 3 ⋅ I 0 − I G ≥ Setting
RTN
Directional: It must show that the fault is internal. The residual current and the neutral current must be opposed.
If the residual current is below 80mA (In 5A models) or 16mA (In 1A models), the directional is not taken into
account.
If the neutral current is below 80mA (In 5A models) or 16mA (In 1A models), the trip is not allowed.
Signalling: restricted earth trip signals are given if the directional shows internal fault and the difference between both
magnitudes is bigger than the threshold.
4.3.2 Autotransformer
The comparation winding setting must be "Autotransformer”
This function is used to protect an autotransformer. The magnitude and the direction are analysed.
Magnitude: If the difference between the residual current of the two windings ( I01 and I02) and the neutral current
(algebraic sum), once applied their corresponding transforming ratio, must exceed the programmed threshold.

RTI1 RTI 2
⋅ 3 ⋅ I 01 + ⋅ 3 ⋅ I 02 − I G ≥ Setting
RTN RTN
Directional: It must show that the fault is internal. The 2 winding residual current and the neutral current must be
opposed.
If the residual current is below 80mA (In 5A models) or 16mA (In 1A models), the directional is not taken into
account.
If the neutral current is below 80mA (In 5A models) or 16mA (In 1A models), the trip is not allowed.
Signalling: restricted earth trip signals are given if the directional shows internal fault and the difference between both
magnitudes is bigger than the threshold.
4.4 PHASE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
4.4.1 General description

It has independent units for each of the windings. Three-phase overcurrent protection, with the following selectable
characteristics (functions 50/51):
Time unit characteristic

Normal inverse time(I BSC or I ANSI)
Inverse short time (IC BSC)
Inverse long time (IL BSC)
Very inverse time (MI BSC or MI ANSI)
Extremely inverse time (EI BSC or EI ANSI)
Special very inverse time (MIEs BSC)
Moderately inverse time(ANSI)
User’s curve (USER 1 o USER 2)
Definite time
Instantaneous characteristic
2 instantaneous elements
Additional time
The settings are in the Console in the following screens:
“Winding 1 overcurrent protection”

“Winding 3 overcurrent protection” (only in 3 winding models)
4.4.2 Range of settings for timed characteristics (6 tables)

Enable phase time unit YES/NO
0.1 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Pickup of time unit (A)
0.02 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Definite time
Type of time response Normal inverse curve, very inverse curve, extremely inverse curve,etc..
User’s curve
Time index 0.05 1.09 0.01 IEC curves
0.5 30.0 0.1 ANSI curves

Definite time (s) 0.0 600.0 0.01
The pickup current is set in secondary Amperes.
Working in definite time, the relay trips as the set time expires once the starting current has been exceeded,
independently from the current value.
Working with curve, the time to trip depends on the selected curve (family and index) and the current value. The curves,
which are normal, very inverse and extremely inverse, or user curves can be selected as corresponding to the standard
BS142 (IEC 255-4) or ANSI. In the curve appendix, graphics and formulas for calculating the time are given, as a
function of the ratio between the current and the pickup current. If the ratio exceeds than 40, 40 will be taken for
calculating.
The maximum error in times, for values that exceeds 50 ms, is 40 ms or 5% of the theoretical value (the higher of the
two). For the definite time setting of 0 ms, the behavior is the same as for the instantaneous characteristic (see next
section).
Note. If an unacceptable index value is programmed for a type of curve, the unit takes the closest acceptable value.
4.4.3 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (low level) (6

tables)
Setting Min Max
Step Notes
Enable YES/NO
0.1 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Phase instantaneous trip (A)
0.02 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Additional time (s) 0.00 60.00 0.01
The trip current is set in secondary Amperes.
If additional time 0 is programmed, for current values between the tripping current and 1.5 times that value, it trips
between 40 and 50 ms; for 2 times the tripping current between 35 and 40 ms, and from 3 times the tripping currents,
on 30 to 35 ms. If an additional time is programmed, this is added to the indicated time.
With additional time that exceeds 50 ms the maximum time error is 30 ms or 5% of the theoretical value (the highest of
the two).
4.4.4 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6

tables)
Setting Min Max
Step Notes
Enable YES/NO
0.1 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Phase instantaneous trip (A)
0.02 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Additional time (s) 0.00 60.00 0.01
The characteristics of the times are the same as in the previous section.
4.5 RESIDUAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

It has independent units for each of the windings.
The protection works in the same way as the phase overcurrent protection, taking as input measurement 3 times the
homopole sequence current module.

   
3 • I 0 = Ia + Ib + Ic

4.5.2 Settings ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables)

Enable residual timing YES/NO
0.2 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Residual timed pickup (A)
0.05 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Definite time
Timed response type Normal, very extrem. Inverse curve, etc
User’s curve
0.05 1.09 0.01 For IEC curves
Time index
0.5 30.0 0.1 For ANSI curves
Definite time (s) 0,1 600.0 0.01
The remarks about curves are the same as the ones quoted for phases.

tables)
Setting Min Max Step Notes
Enable YES/NO
0.2 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Residual instantaneous pickup (A)
0.05 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Instantaneous additional time (s) 0.10 60.00 0.01
The remarks about additional time are the same as the ones quoted for phases.
4.5.4 Setting ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6

tables)
Enable YES/NO
0.2 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Residual instantaneous pickup (A)
0.05 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
The remarks about additional time are the same as the ones quoted for phases
4.6 CURRENT UNBALANCE PROTECTION

It has independent units for each of the windings.
It contains the protection functions for instantaneous and time unit unbalances.

This protection works in identical fashion to the phase overcurrent protection using 3 times the inverse sequence current
module as the input measure.
   
3 • I 2 = Ia + a 2 • Ib + a • Ic Where a =1|120º
It must be taken in account that the order of phase A-B-C or C-B-A is programmable, so I2 depend on this setting.

4.6.2 Setting ranges for time unit characteristics (6 tables)

Enable unbalance time unit. YES/NO
0.2 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Unbalance time. unit pickup (A)
0.05 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Definite time
Timed response type Normal, very extrem. Inverse curve, etc
User’s curve
0,05 1,09 0,01 For IEC curves
Time index
0,5 30,0 0,1 For ANSI curves
Definite time (s) 0,1 600,0 0,01
The remarks made regarding the curves are the same as those given for the phases.
4.6.3 Setting range for instantaneous characteristics (6 tables)

Enable instantaneous unbalance unit. YES/NO
0.2 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Instantaneous unbalance pickup (A)
0.05 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
The remarks made regarding the additional time are the same as those given for the phases.
4.7 NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

It is only available in 2 winding models (50G/51G function).
It has two independent units that use the logical input measurements 4 (unit 1) and 5 (unit 2). It works with the same
characteristic possibilities as those described for phases and independent settings for both units.
The settings are in the Console, on the screen “Earthed protection”.
4.7.2 Range of settings for timed characteristic (6 tables)

Enable neutral time unit YES/NO
0.1 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Pickup neutral time unit (A)
0.02 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Timed response type Definite time

Normal, very extrem. Inverse curve, etc

User’s curve
Time index
The remarks about curves and accuracy are the same as the ones quoted for phases.

tables)
Enable neutral instantaneous YES/NO
0.1 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Neutral instantaneous pickup (A)
0.02 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Additional instantaneous time (s) 0.00 60.00 0.01
The trip current is set in Amperes in the secondary.
The remarks regarding the operation time are the same as those given for the phases.
4.7.4 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6

tables)
Enable neutral instantaneous YES/NO
0.1 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Neutral instantaneous pickup (A)
0.02 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Additional instantaneous time (s) 0.00 60.00 0.01
The time characteristics are the same as those given for the phases.
4.8 OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

3-unit overvoltage protection, that may be simple or compound (See “General settings”), with the following selectable
characteristics (function 59):
Time delay:
Reverse normal time ( I BSC or I ANSI)
Reverse short time (IC BSC)
Reverse long time (IL BSC)
Moderately inverse time (ANSI)
2 user’s curve (USUAR 1 to USUAR 2)
Definite time
Instantaneous characteristics:

Instantaneous element.
Additional time.
This protection operation does not cause automatic reclosing.
4.8.2 Settings ranges of the time characteristic (6 tables)

Phase time enable YES/NO
Phase time pick up (V) 10 200 0.1
definite time
inverse normal curve
Time response time very inverse "
extrem. inverse "
User’s "
Time index
0.5 30.0 0.1 For ANSIcurves
These settings are located in the Console in the “Voltage protection” screen.
The time response curves are the same as those used by the overprotection protections.
The pick up voltage is set in Volt in the secondary.
Working in definite time, the relay trips as the set time expires once the starting voltage has been exceeded,
independently from the voltage value.
Working with curve, the time to trip depends on the selected curve (family and index) and the voltage value. In Appendix
II, the graphics and the formulae are given for the time calculation, depeding on the quotient between the voltage and the
start voltage.
The remarks about the accuracy in the times are the same as those given for the overcurrent function.
4.8.3 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (6 tables) .

Phase instantaneous enable YES/NO
Phase instantaneous trip (V) 10 200 0.1
These settings are located in the Console in the “Voltage protrection” screen.
The trip voltage is set in Volts in the secondary.
The remarks regarding the time are the same as those given for the overcurrent function
Note.- Both in the time and instantaneous function, once the protection is started, the drop occurs when the voltage get down to the 99% of the value
programmed as pick up, if it is higher than 50 V (or to the 98% if its is lower).
4.9 UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

3-unit undervoltage protection, that may be simple or compound (See “General settings”, with the following selectable
characteristics (function 59):
Time delay:
Reverse normal time ( I BSC or I ANSI)

Reverse short time (IC BSC)

Reverse long time (IL BSC)
Moderately inverse time (ANSI)
2 user’s curve (USUAR 1 to USUAR 2)
Definite time
Instantaneous characteristics:
Instantaneous element.
Additional time.
This protection operation does not cause automatic reclosing.
4.9.2 Settings ranges of the time characteristic (6 tables)

Habilitación temporizado fases SI/NO
Phase time pick up (V) 10 200 0,1
definite time
inverse normal curve
Time response type very inverse "
extrem. inverse "
User’s
0,05 1.09 0.01 For IEC curves
Time index
The time response curves are the same as those used by the overprotection protections.
The pick up voltage is set in Volt in the secondary.
Working in definite time, the relay trips as the set time expires after it drops below the stat voltage, independently from
the voltage value.
Working with curve, the time to trip depends on the selected curve (family and index) and the voltage value. In Appendix
II, the graphics and the formulae are given for the time calculation, depeding on the quotient between the voltage and the
start voltage.
The remarks about the accuracy in the times are the same as those given for the overcurrent function.
4.9.3 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (6 tables)

Phase instantaneous enabling YES/NO
Phase instantaneous trip (V) 10 200 0.1
The trip voltage is set in Volts in the secondary.

Note.- Both in the time and instantaneous function, once the protection is started, the drop occurs when the voltage is increased to the 101% of the value
programmed as pick up, if it is higher than 50 V (or to the 102% if its is lower).

4.10 OVEREXCITATION PROTECTION
4.10.1 5th harmonic

The 5th harmonic current percent is measured regarding the 1st harmonic in the primary winding. The trip occurs when
the 5th harmonic value in any phase exceeds the setting during the programmed time
The settings (4 tables) used are the following:

Enable YES/NO
0.50 10 0.01 In = 5 A
Operation minimum current
0.1 2 0.01 In = 1 A
Pick-up threshold (V/Hz) 5 100 1
Definite time (sec) 0 600 0.01
The settings are in the Console, on the “Additional Protection” screen.
4.10.2 V/f
These units are only available in 2 winding models
It has two independent units
The ratio between the voltage measurement and the frequency is measured. The trip occurs when this value is higher than
the setting during the programmed time. It can operate with definite time or with time curve.
The accuracy of this unit is better than the 5% in the range of ±3Hz.
The setting used for each units are the following:

Enable YES/NO
Operation minimum voltage 50 150 1
Pick up threshold (V/Hz) 1.00 4.00 0.01
Definite time
Timed response type Normal, very, extrem. Inverse curve, etc
User’s curve
Time index
Fixed time (sec) 0 600 0.01
The settings are in the Console, on the “Additional Protection” screen.
The notes on curves are the same as the ones given for the phase timing.
4.11 FREQUENCY PROTECTION

This function consists of 5 steps, which can be programmed as maximum or minimum frequency.
The independent settings for each of the steps are the following ones:
Parameters Min. Max. Step Notes

Enable YES/NO (for each step)
Pick- up (Hz) 45 65 0.01 (For each step)
Definite time(s) 0 600.00 0.01 (For each step)
Type Maximum/Minimum

The common settings for all the steps are the following:
Parameters Min. Max. Step Notes

Supervision minimum voltage (V) 40 200 1 (For all the steps)
Number of pick-up cycles 3 15 1 (for all the steps)
The response time of this unit will be that corresponding to the number of pick up cycles programmed in the setting plus 35 ms.
The settings are in the Console, on the “Frequency Protection” screen.
4.11.1 Minimum frequency

In each step, the pick up occurs if the frequency is lower than the value set during a number of cycles that is the same or
exceeds the “Number of pick-up cycles” setting. Once it is picked-up, the programmed time must be exceeded in order to
trip. The unit drops out if the frequency is correct during 2 cycles.
Locks
If the current measurement is lower than the “Supervision minimum voltage” setting the frequency unit pick up is not
allowed.
4.11.2 Maximum frequency

This function occurs if the frequency exceeds the value set during a number of cycles that is the same or exceeds than the
“Number of pick-up cycles” setting.” Once it is picked-up, the programmed time must be exceeded in order to trip. The
unit drops out if the frequency is correct during 2 cycles.
Locks
If the current measurement is lower than the “Supervision minimum voltage” setting the frequency unit pick up is not
allowed.
4.12 THERMAL IMAGE

It has two independent units for each of the windings.
This function calculates the temperature according to the current and recent protected unit conditions. This temperature is
displayed as a % of the trip value. If the function is enabled when the programmed value is reached a warning signal is activated
and when it reaches 100% the thermal image trip signal is activated. Once it has tripped due to this cause, the relay does not
drop out meanwhile the calculated temperature remains above 75% or the calculated temperature remains over the alarm
threshold. The calculated temperature can be reseted by means of keyboard/display (entering by "↓" to “.TEMPERATUR Acknow.”
and pushing ↓ for two seconds) or by console command.
The time taken to reach trip status is given by the curves attached. These provided the time according to the ratio between the
current and the programmed nominal current according to the programmed heating constant. They match the following formula
(starting from temperature 0):
Being:
t: trip time
τ1: heating constant

I: average current
I0: programmed nominal current
Once it has tripped, there is another time invariant that can be programmed for the cooling.
In the following table the trip times are shown
The settings used by this unit are the following ones:

Enable YES/NO
Heating time constant (min) 3 60 1
Cooling time constant (min) 3 60 1
Alarm threshold (%) 80 100 1
0.2 10 0.01 In = 5 A
Nominal current (A)
0.04 2 0.01 In = 1 A

4.12.1 Heating curves

The heating curve is calculated from the following formula:
Being:
Tf = final temperature
Ti= initial temperature
t = time
= heating time constant
For Ti = 0 the formula will be
As
It results as a heating curve
The following figure gives, as an example, the heating curves, with 3 min time constant for I/I0 = 1 and for I/I0 = 2

4.12.2 Cooling curves

The cooling curve has the following formula:
Being:
Tf = final temperature
Ti = initial temperature
t = time
= cooling time constant
From Ti = 1 (100 in %), the temperature at which the trip occurs, in order to reach a final temperature Tf = 0 (that is,
with current I = 0), the formula will be reduced to:
Example: cooling curve with a 3 minute constant
Examples combining heating and cooling:
1. Let’s assume that for 200 sec it is heated with I/I0 =1, the following 200 sec (without tripping) withI/I0 = 2, and from
that point it returns indefinitely to I/I0 = 1 (both 3-minute time constants):

2. Let’s assume that for 200 sec it is heated with I/I0 =0.5, and then with I/I0 = 1.5 up to reach the 100%, when it trips.
From that moment it gets cold with I//I0 = 0 (both 3-minute time constants):
4.13 BREAKER
4.13.1 Breaker failure protection

It has independent units for each of the breakers.
Output relays can be programmed as follows:
breaker failure to close. It works watching the "state 52" input

breaker failure to open. It works watching the "state 52" input
failure to open with overcurrent. It operates according to a group of settings generically called "Breaker failure":
Enable function
Phase drop out current
Neutral drop out current ( in 2-winding models)
Re-trip definite time
Trip definite time
If the function is enabled it operates as follows: if the unit gives a trip signal or an external protection actuation signal is
received through a digital input, a timer is activated and it must be checked if the winding maximum phase current
exceeds the amount programmed as "phase drop out current" or the neutral (neutral 1 and neutral 2 measurements)
exceeds the "neutral drop out current". The signals generated are the following:
Retrip: if once the trip definite time is passed, the winding maximum phase current and/or neutral current exceeds the
amount programmed.
Failure to open with overcurrent: if once the trip definite time is passed, the phase current and/or neutral current
exceeds the amount programmed.
These signals are only deactivated when the phase and neutral currents are below their restoring values.
If a LED has been programmed as a “Breaker failure (failure to open with overcurrent)”it is activated as the relay, but it
can only be deactivated by recognising through keyboard/display in “Last fault” as the LEDS that set trips.
The external protection signal is internally memorized, that is, it may be an impulse type signal.
In this type of operation, the current values are taken into consideration and not the digital input of the breaker status.

The settings are in the Console on the “winding breaker” screen:

Enable YES/NO
0.1 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Phase drop out (A)
0.02 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
0.1 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Neutral drop out (A)
0.02 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Definite time (sec) 0.05 60.00 0.01
Trip definite time (sec) 0.05 60.00 0.01
The retrip definite time must be lower than the trip definite time.
4.13.2 Operation Logic

It has two independent units for each of the breakers.
Trip sealing: If set on "YES" when a trip signal is activated, it is kept this way until you see the breaker open, although the
trip cause has disappeared. If set on "NO" the trip signal disappears when its cause disappears (although the relay
excitation is guaranteed for at least the time programmed in the digital outputs programming.).
Close sealing: If set on "YES" when a close command occurs, it is kept this way until you see the breaker close, although
the command has disappeared. If set on "NO" the close signal disappears when the command disappears (although the
relay excitation is guaranteed for at least the time programmed in the digital outputs programming.).
The open and close failure time units allow enough time from the moment the corresponding command is issued and the
breaker actuation signal is received, in order to consider it has worked correctly. If such is not the case, a signal is created
for failure to open and another one for failure to close.
The setting is in the Console on the “Winding breaker” screen:

Trip sealing YES/NO
Close sealing YES/NO
Breaker failure to open time unit (sec) 0.1 5.0 0.01
Breaker failure to close time unit (sec) 0.1 5.0 0.01
4.13.3 Breaker supervision

A signal is created every time that, after a trip, the ∑kI2 counter exceeds the programmed threshold. At any time the
counter can be reset to its initial value by command.
For the calculation of the pole wear, the desired calculation type can be programmed among kI2*t, kI2 and kI.
If Ki2 is chosen, the kA2 are calculated, being I the current measured after elapsing the waiting time set after the trip.
If kI is chosen only the sum of the currents in kA is calculated, being I the current measured after elapsing the waiting
time set after the trip.
If Ki2 *t is chosen, the Ki2 /100 value is being accumulated every 10ms, being I the current measured after elapsing
the waiting time set after the trip. It finishes accumulating when I < 0.05 A.
The setting is in the Console on the “Winding breaker” screen.

Alarm threshold ΣkI2 0 65534 1
Initial value ΣkI2 0 65534 1
4.13.4 Coil supervision


The trip and close circuit supervision allow checking the continuity of the circuits of the trip and close coils, when the
breaker is both open or close (see the connection procedure example). The supervision inputs have to be assigned (open
circuit with open breaker and with close breaker, close circuit with open breaker and with close breaker).
The setting is in the Console on the “Winding breaker” screen

Enable trip circuit supervision YES/NO
Enable close circuit supervision YES/NO
In the following figure, an example of the close coil supervision connection is shown. The trip coil connections would be
similar.
When the broker is closed, the “52a” contact is also closed, and if there is continuity in the circuit, the input programmed
as “Coil supervision with 52 closed” is seen as closed: if there was no continuity, it would be seen as open (circuit
failure).
When the broker is open the “52b” contact is, and if there is continuity in the circuit, the input programmed as “Coil
supervision with 52 open” is seen as closed: if there was no continuity, it would be seen as open (circuit failure).
The “close circuit failure” or “open circuit failure” signals are activated 20 s after the failure is detected, in case it
remains after that time, keeping activated while the failure is kept.

DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTION 
5. DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTION
5.1 EVENTS REPORTS

The following shows a list of events the protection is able to generate (if it has the corresponding functions, which are optional in
many cases). Each event incorporates its date and time and the differential currents as well as the available analogue input
measurements. The protection system saves a queue of 400 events on the volatile memory that can be retrieved from the PC.
Setting changes
Activation table 1
Activation table 2
Activation table 3
Activation table 4
Change setting table 0
Communications
Local mode (acts from keyboard/display)
Local mode (acts through front port)
Remote mode (acts through rear port)
Protection state
Relay in service
Relay out of service
Selfchecking
Relay off
Relay on
Power supply low
Critical Hardware error
Converter reference voltage error
Converter error
FLASH memory recording error
Relays activation error
SPI communication error (between micro and DSP)
Non critical Hardware error
" clock synchronization
Error de HW corrected

Inputs
Activation of digital input xx (1 to 17)
Deactivation of digital input xx (1 to 17)
Command (for each breaker)

Breaker closure
Breaker opening
Breaker close command (control message or input)
Breaker open command (control message or output)
Winding1 breaker opening
Breaker failure (for each breaker)

Breaker failure output activation
Breaker output activation in tripping circuit.
Breaker output activation in closing circuit.
Failure 52 pickup by phase current
Failure 52 trip by phase current
Failure 52 retrip by phase current
Failure 52 restore by phase current
Failure 52 pickup by neutral current
Failure 52 trip by neutral current (for G1 and G2)
Failure 52 retrip by neutral current (for G1 and G2)
Failure 52 restore by neutral current (for G1 and G2)
Exceeded the maximum of the circuit breaker supervision accumulator
Overflow of the circuit breaker supervision accumulator
Current at zero after command
Differential Protection
Pick-up phase A percent differential unit
Pick-up phase B percent differential unit
Pick-up phase C percent differential unit
Activation phase A percent differential trip output
Activation phase B percent differential trip output
Activation phase C percent differential trip output
Pick-up phase A instantaneous differential unit
Pick-up phase B instantaneous differential unit
Pick-up phase C instantaneous differential unit
Activation phase A instantaneous differential trip output
Activation phase B instantaneous differential trip output
Activation phase C instantaneous differential trip output
Restricted earth pick-up 1
Restricted earth trip 1
Restricted earth pick-up 2
Restricted earth trip 2

Activation close locking

Deactivation close locking
Protection (for each winding)

Phase A timed pick-up
Phase B timed pick-up
Phase C timed pick-up
Neutral timed pick-up
Phase A instantaneous pick-up
Phase B instantaneous pick-up
Phase C instantaneous pick-up
Neutral instantaneous pick-up
Activation of phase A timed output.
Activation of phase B timed output.
Activation of phase C timed output.
Activation of neutral timed output.
Activation of phase A instantaneous output.
Activation of phase B instantaneous output.
Activation of phase C instantaneous output.
Activation of neutral instantaneous output.
Current unbalance timed pick-up
Current unbalance instantaneous pick-up
Activation of current unbalance timed output
Activation of current unbalance instantaneous output
Thermal image alarm
Thermal image trip
Earthed protection (G1 and G2)

Timed pick-up
Timed trip
Instantaneous pick-up
Instantaneous trip
Frequency and overexcitation protection

Trip by minimum frequency (step 1)
Trip by maximum frequency
Trip by overexcitation V/f step 1
Trip by overexcitation V/f step 2
Trip by overexcitation 5th harmonic

5.2 FAULT RECORDS

The protection stores in non-volatile memory a queue of the 20 last faults retrievable from the PC with the following information:
Available units
Units tripped during fault
Units picked up during fault
Fault starting date and time (first picked up unit)
Tripping date and time (first picked up unit)
Fault ending date and time (when the trip signal disappears
Current cleared by the winding (maximum of phase currents detected between the moment of the tripping order and the
breaker opening)
Settings group active during the fault
Type of fault and type of trip: 3 letters (general and by winding).
For general reasons, DIF is shown for differential faults, GND for restricted earth, N for neutral, F for frequency, V for
overvoltage, 5 for 5th harmonic overexcitation and E for V/f overexcitation.
For each winding, it is formed by combinations of the following characters: A, B, C, R, D, I, depending on what it has
tripped in each phase, residual, unbalance, thermal image. For example: AC is a two-phase fault phase A and C.
Differential current (module and angle) in phase A fault and prefault
Differential current (module and angle) in phase B fault and prefault
Differential current (module and angle) in phase C fault and prefault
Current restraint (module and angle) in phase A fault and prefault
Current restraint (module and angle) in phase B fault and prefault
Current restraint (module and angle) in phase C fault and prefault
Phase A current (module and angle) in each winding fault and prefault.
Phase B current (module and angle) in each winding fault and prefault.
Phase C current (module and angle) in each winding fault and prefault.
Neutral current (module and angle) in fault and prefault. Only in 2 winding models. It gives the measurement of the two
neutral.
Voltage (module and angle) in fault and prefault. Only in 2 winding models
The currents and the voltages in fault are simultaneous and they are those that exist at the moment of the tip command.
The currents and the voltages in pre-fault are simultaneous and they are those that existed 3 cycles before the pickup.
Besides they are stored in non-volatile memory and the data corresponding to the last ten faults can be retrievable through the
keyboard/display:
Phases that have been tripped.

Each phase differential current and restraint current at the moment of the trip.
Each phase and neutral current at the moment of the trip.
Data and starting and ending time of the fault.
5.3 MEASUREMENTS
The available measurements depends on the model:
2 winding model: voltage, current and ground measurements, but it does not have winding 3 phase measurements.
3 winding models: winding 3 phases measurements, but it does not have voltage, frequency and neutral measurements.

5.3.1 Measurements at the secondary

They are measurements referred to the fundamental component, which are the ones used by the protection functions: The
differential and restraint measurements are viewed according to the reference shown in the setting “winding comparation.
The measurements of 2nd/2nd+4th shown is the magnitude selected in the energization restrain.
5.3.1.1 By keyboard/display
Differential measurements
Phase A fundamental component (module)
Phase B fundamental component (module)
Phase C fundamental component (module)
Phase A 2nd/2nd+4th harmonic component (module)
Phase B 2nd/2nd+4th harmonic component (module)
Phase C 2nd/2nd+4th harmonic component (module)
Phase A 5th harmonic component (module)
Phase B 5th harmonic component (module)
Phase C 5th harmonic component (module)
Phase A restraint current (module)
Phase B restraint current (module)
Phase C restraint current (module)
In each winding:
Phase A current (module in Amperes and angles in degrees)

Phase B current (module in Amperes and angles in degrees)
Phase C current (module in Amperes and angles in degrees)
In 2 winding models:
Voltage (module in Amperes and angles in degrees)

Neutral current 1 (module in Amperes and angles in degrees)
Frequency
All the arguments are referred to the voltage (2 winding models) or to the phase A current of the winding 1 (3
winding models).
5.3.1.2 By PC (Protection Console)

They are on the first of the “STATUS” screens
Differential measurements:
Phase A fundamental component (module)

Phase B fundamental component (module)
Phase C fundamental component (module)
Phase A 2nd/2nd+4th harmonic component (module)
Phase B 2nd/2nd+4th harmonic component (module)
Phase C 2nd/2nd+4th harmonic component (module)
Phase A 5th harmonic component (module)

Phase B 5th harmonic component (module)

Phase C 5th harmonic component (module)
Phase A restraint current (module)
Phase B restraint current (module)
Phase C restraint current (module)
In each winding:
Phase A current (module in Amperes and angles in degrees)

Phase B current (module in Amperes and angles in degrees)
Phase C current (module in Amperes and angles in degrees)
Current maximeter (in Amperes)
Thermal Image temperature
In 2 winding models:
Voltage (module in Amperes and angles in degrees)

Frequency
All the arguments are referred to the phase A phase to ground voltage.
5.3.2 Measurements at the primary

They appear on the screens “MEASUREMENTS”
Phase A current of each winding(in Amperes)

Phase B current of each winding (in Amperes)
Phase C current of each winding (in Amperes)
Average current of each winding (in Amperes)
Current maximeter of each winding (in Amperes)
Simple voltage
Frequency (in Hz)
5.4 MEASUREMENT HISTORICAL REPORT

The protection keeps in non-volatile memory a queue of 4000 historical measurement records, about the available winding
currents (2 or 3 depending on the model) and retrievable from a PC (Protections console).
Each record includes the maximum and minimum average currents of each winding (computed within a programmable time
window) detected during an also programmable register period. The currents are secondary Amperes.

The settings used are the following ones:

Time window for measurement (min.) 1 15 1
Historical register period (min.) 1 1440 1
Recording day mask Monday to Sunday YES/NO
Mask disable YES/NO
Register start time 0 24 1
Register end time 0 24 1
The operation is as follows; every second the current values are added to their respective accumulators (average of the three
phases); when the time window is fulfilled, the accumulated value is divided by the number of the window seconds, in order to
get the average value. When the programmed register interval is fulfilled, the maximum and minimum values of the
measurements obtained during that interval are registered.
The register interval is automatically synchronized with the clock, so if it is programmed to 15 minutes, 4 registers an hour will
be carried out, that is, after 0, 15, 30 and 45 minutes.
The operation of the recording day mask:
If the “Mask disable” setting is at “YES” the record is carried out every day of the week. If it is at “NO” what has been
programmed for each day must be taken into account. If one day is at “YES” it is recorded, and if it is at “NO” it is not recorded.
5.5 STATISTICAL DATA

The same information can be obtained by keyboard / display or through PC (screen "STATISTICAL DATA"):
kI2 sum (square kA interrupted by each breaker).

Each breaker openings counter (by tripping or by manual opening)
Each breaker trip counter (by tripping)
All these counters can be set to 0, and the kI2 sum set to the initial value programmed as setting.)
In the keyboard/display there is a pick up counter available, which indicates the number of times the unit has been switched or
reseted. With this counter anomalies in the supply or in the unit can be detected.
5.6 PROTECTION STATUS
5.6.1 By keyboard / display

It can be seen:
Date and time of the relay.

Status of each of the digital inputs: open (A) or closed (C).
5.6.2 Through PC (Protections Console)

On the "STATUS" screens, apart from the measurements already mentioned, it is possible to see:
on the screen 1
Date and time of the relay
Active table

on the screen 2 and 3

Protection units picked up at the present moment
Protection units tripped at the present moment
on the screen 4
Units tripped on the last trip
on the screen 5
Command orders
Breaker supervision status
Closing and trip circuit supervision status
on the screen 6
Status of digital inputs, digital outputs and LEDs
5.7 OSCILLOGRAPH DATA RECORDER

It has a 1200 cycle capacity, being programmable the number of cycles per perturbation, so if, for example, 40 cycle/register is
programmed, there will be room for 30 registers, if 120 cycles/register there will be room for 10, etc. The number of cycles
previous to the pick-up is also programmable between 1 and 100. On each record there are up to 9 analogue channels registered
and up to 32 digital channels, which can be chosen from a list selected from the available signals.
Each record can be started by a rising slope of each of the digital signals considered by the protection model.
The analogical channels are sent to the console multiplied by the transformation ratio so that they appear on primary values. The
number of samples per analogue channel cycle is 32.

OTHER FUNCTIONS 
6. OTHER FUNCTIONS
6.1 TIME SETTING AND SYNCHRONIZATION
6.1.1 Time setting

It can be done from the keyboard/display (within "Settings (change)") or from the Protection Console (Screen 1 "STATUS").
6.1.2 Synchronization
There is an input for synchronization demodulated by IRIG-B (see section “IRIG-B input” inside “Technical
characteristics”). This system allows the time assigning to events among connected devices to be synchronised within a
1ms margin.
The IRIG-B time code is a mesh generated once a second. The code used is B 003, in which the mesh is constituted by a
pulse train with TTL levels of variable widths. The time it shows, corresponds to the PPS (pulse per second) which
coincides with the Mesh Reference mark of the mesh beginning. There are two options:
Format B002: the year is not sent in the message.

Format B002 with IEEE 1344: the year is sent in the message.
If there is synchronization through irig-b, synchronization is not allowed through keyboard or communications.
In Integrated Control Systems (SIPC) of the unit, it is periodically synchronized (every minute) by the UCS. In this case, it
is worthless to carry out a change of time by keyboard or Protection Console, because in a short time it will be eliminated
by the UCS.
6.2 CONTROL MESSAGES

The protection responds to the following control messages
Measurements, changes and counters request Digital status request

Clock synchronization
Statistical data initialization commands
Commands for relays and specified digital signals
Statistical data request
The transmitted measurements and the order they are sent is programmable. In the “Available signals” appendix all the available
measurements and the order they leave the factory with are shown. The scale background indicates corresponds to 4095 counts.
The digital signals treated (changes and states) are those indicated in the “Available Signal” appendix. The signals to be sent and
their position can be programmed in any protocol.
The statistical data initialisation commands make possible to set at 0 the opening counters, trips, the maximeter and setting the
initial value programmed as sum kI2.
The command orders are programmable in any protocol. In the “Available Signal” appendix all the available orders and the value
they leave the factory with are shown...

OTHER FUNCTIONS 
6.3 LOCAL/REMOTE COMMAND

The unit can be in local or remote (Tele-control) mode.
The transition from one mode to the other one can be made by digital input, if there is one programmed for that purpose or by
command. The operation is alternative, that is, each time the input is pressed or activated (rising slope) the status is changed.
The control commands described in the previous section are only operative on the Remote mode. The opening and closing
commands by digital input (if they are programmed) are as much operative on the Local mode as on the Remote (to make
possible the operation from contacts activated by a remote station).
Unit in LOCAL status:
It admits commands through the front plate keyboard (if they are enabled by setting).
It admits commands through Digital Input.
It admits the output activation commands, the breaker triggering commands and so on, ended in “Local” in order to be used
from the Console.
It does not admit the remaining control commands.
It admits the command to PASS to REMOTE.
Unit in REMOTE status:
It does not admit commands through the front plate keyboard.

It admits commands through Digital Input.
It does not admit the local Console commands (those ending in “Local”).
It admits the remaining control commands.
It admits the command to PASS to LOCAL.
When the unit starts, it always happens on the “Remote” mode.
6.4 COMMANDS BY KEYBOARD

If “FUNCTIONALS” have been programmed in “Pushbuttons” by keyboard/display, commands can be executed from the keys
located in the unit front plate. Key ↑ and the one of the desired function must be simultaneously pushed.
Programming which command is going to be executed with each key is carried out through the console in the “Command
Configuration” screen.
In the first row all the keys that can be used appear, with the ON and OFF indications, since they operate as a two-state, and
when changing its state they execute the programmed command.
The pushbuttons execute the programmed command when pushing them (they differ from “open”, “Close” command in the fact
that “.” has to be pushed at the same time in order to execute them.). The keys execute the command when pushing them at the
same time as “↑”.
The row PUSHBUTTON TYPE (confirmation) can be programmed at “NO”, so the command is immediately executed, or at
“YES”, so confirmation is requested through the display, which is validate with “Intro”; if confirmation is not wanted, push
“ESC”.
It is possible programming several commands for the same key; they are sequentially executed (upside down).

OTHER FUNCTIONS 
6.5 POWER SUPPLY SUPERVISION

Only in models with this option. This function detects the power supply voltage drop under a level that guarantees the correct
display of the digital input state. This function is enabled by setting (configuration setting), but the limits for the detection are
fixed according to the selection of the auxiliary power supply (see model coding):
Power supply Detection level

125/220 Vdc 84 V
24/48 Vdc 17 V
The agony signal is activated when the power supply is under the detection level corresponding to the supply time. In this
situation the protection:
is set out of service

generates Hardware Error and low power supply signals
6.6 EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY SUPERVISION

Only available in those models with “Battery voltage measurement”.
This function checks if the external supply voltage is inside the margin set. It generates two signals:
Auxiliary power supply higher than maximum threshold. If the supply voltage exceeds the maximum set threshold.
Auxiliary power supply lower than maximum threshold. If the supply voltage is lower than the minimum set threshold.
The settings of this function are the following ones:

Enable YES/NO
Minimum threshold (V) 20 220 1
Maximum threshold (V) 24 280 1
6.7 TEMPERATURE SUPERVISION

This function checks if the unit temperature is inside the set margin. It generates two signals:
Temperature higher than maximum threshold. If the temperature exceeds the maximum set threshold.
Temperature lower than minimum threshold. If the temperature is lower than the minimum set threshold.
The settings of this function are the following ones:

Enable YES/NO
Minimum threshold (º) -40 0 1
Maximum threshold (º) 50 100 1

OPERATION MODE 
7. OPERATION MODE
7.1 THROUGH KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
7.1.1 Introduction
The purpose of the keyboard/display is the local introduction to the unit of settings and commands, and the view of
settings, measurements and faults through display.
7.1.2 Elements of the keyboard /display unit

They are 8, which can be programmed to show some of the status indicated in the section "Programming of LEDs".".
It is alphanumerical, liquid crystal type and has 2 rows of 16 columns each.
They are 16, signalized as ↑,↓ ,INTRO, ESC, (dot) and the numbers from 0 to 9
7.1.2.1 Pushbutton "↓"

It is the only push-button accessible with the protection cover on.
By successive pushing the following information starts to appear
Digital inputs status

Phase A, B and C current (of each winding)
Neutral current (only in 2 winding model)
Voltage (only in 2 winding model)
Phase A, B and C differential current
Phase A, B and C restraint current
Last fault information
Phases involved
Phase A, B and C current (of each winding)
Neutral current (only in 2 winding model)
Voltage (only in 2 winding model)
Phase A, B and C differential current
Phase A, B and C restraint current
Start data and time
End data and time
Fault acknowledgement (press 2 sec. and release). Turn the tripping LEDs off
7.1.2.2 R Pushbutton
It rearms the closing unlock function 86

OPERATION MODE 
7.1.3 Operating mode
7.1.3.1 General description

At standby, the display shows the “PD-300” and the software version it contains.
At any time of the process, which is described below, the pressing of the key “ESCAPE” takes the unit to the
menu element of the immediately precedent level.
The menus will be scrolled downwards or upwards with the keys "↓" and "↑", and they are circular this means
that after the last position, the first will return again.
Generally, when a menu is scrolled, the first line of the display shows the active function, which can be
entered by pressing INTRO, and, in this way, we can reach the next menu level (if there is any), specific for
that function.
The menu tree to visualize or change settings within each group is hierarchical. If at resting status (title) we
press INTRO, we will reach the first element of the following menu:
SEE TIME
SEE ACTIVE TABLE
INPUTS
MEASUREMENTS
STATISTICAL DATA
LAST FAULT
SETTINGS (see)
SETTINGS (change)
The complete hierarchy of menus and submenus is represented in the “Keyboard/display” Appendix.
7.1.3.2 Using the keyboard/display

7.1.3.2.1 See settings and magnitudes
With the keys “↑“ and “↓“ we can scroll inside each menu or submenu (as shown above) up
or down, as the menus are circular.
By pressing “INTRO” we enter the next menu level. If there is no submenu by pressing
“INTRO” the display state does not change.
The pressing of “ESC” takes us to the immediate upper level of the menu, this means, the
one from which we reached the actual status.
In the final menus, which are the ones with no submenus (settings), the group setting name,
selected by keyboard appears in the first row, while in the second row there appears its
present value.
7.1.3.2.2 Change settings

Up to the last level of the menus everything works in the same way as in “Settings (see) and
magnitudes” (same functions for same keys).
To access to this function, it is necessary to press the key "↑↑↓↓". Through this all settings
and initializations are made accessible, except the ones contained in the section "Define
protection”. To get access to them, the key "↑↓↵↵" is necessary.
In the last level of the menus, where the name of the settings we want to change appear, the
keyboard operation is different from the one we have explained until now.
When entering into each group to change the settings, which are included (final menu), the
keyboard operation will be as it follows:

OPERATION MODE 
1) Numerical settings. The first line of the display shows the name of the selected setting
followed by its current value. The line 2 shows the text NEW followed by the current setting
range, which can be changed by using the numerical keyboard.
To change the setting range we use the numerical keyboard, along with the DOT. The new
range has to be literally entered; this means that if we wish to enter the new value of 3.2 the
key 3 will have to be pressed, then the key DOT followed by the key 2. If the value is not
valid, when pushing “INTRO” to access to the next setting, a warning message will be shown
on the line 2 indicating INVALID VALUE. A valid value will have to be entered to be able to
access the next setting within the group, by pressing “INTRO”. The pressing of “ESC” within
the final menu takes us to the menu element, which we came from, without making effective
the changes we have made until the moment of pressing.
The changes are made effective when at the moment of reaching the last group setting and
pressing “INTRO”, we receive the message VALIDATE SETTINGS and press “INTRO” to
validate the changes; if we validate them by pressing “INTRO”, we would return to the next
element of the menu above (see menus chart). By pressing “ESC” we return to the menu
element from which we reached the present state.
2) Non numerical settings. There are settings such as the enabling settings, where it must be
chosen between YES or NO, ON and OFF. There are also calendar masks which can be
enabled every other day, there are time delayed curves with a certain name, inputs and
outputs configurations etc. where is more clear to select them by their name rather than by
introducing their numerical value.
Whenever possible and clear, on the line 1 the name of the setting will appear along with a
text indicating the actual value. On the second line it will gradually appear the possible
values to choose for this setting, if we use the keyboard properly. We use the key “↑“ to go
through the different possibilities we have on each state. In the case of inputs, outputs or
leds configuration we can use the keys “↑“ and “↓“ to select the configuration of each of
them; we do it this way because there are many configurations to choose from and this makes
it quicker.
By pressing “INTRO” we access to the next setting within the group, if there is any, and if
there is not any we validate the value chosen on the line 2. That is, in groups with an only
element, the validate option, which is present in the different groups with more than one
element, will not appear. In these, an only element cases, there is no need to confirm the
validation, if we want to leave the setting as it was, we press “ESC” and the setting will not
change.
In the case of inputs, outputs, leds configuration, the pressing of “INTRO” takes us from
configuring the input/output/led i to configuring input/outputs/led i+1. The same occurs with
the inputs mask and the calendar mask which runs trough the days of the week by each
pressing of “INTRO”; within each day it could be chosen between “YES” and “NO” with the
arrow “↑“.
As for the numerical settings, the pressing of “ESC” takes us to the menu element from
which we reach the present status.
3) Initializations and special settings.
Within the first submenu of "Change settings" we find the option: "INITIALIZE, MAXIM, kI2."
where, by pushing INTRO, we can reach:
"OPEN Dx=0?" by pushing INTRO the maximeter is set to 0.
"TRIPS Dx=0?" by pushing INTRO the maximeter is set to 0.
"MAXIMETER Dx=0?" by pushing INTRO the maximeter is set to 0.
"KI2 Dx=INIT. DX?" by pushing INTRO the accumulator takes the setting value of
corresponding to the table indicated by the active table.
"RESET QUEUES?"; by pushing INTRO all queues of events, faults, historic and oscillograph
data record are reset.
Being “x” the winding number

OPERATION MODE 
Change of active table

In the first level of "SETTINGS (change)", pressing "INTRO" when by "ACTIVATE TABLE"
appears "TABLE 1"; with the arrows ↑ and ↓ we can go on to "TABLE n" (n is the number of
tables). When the aimed one is reached, press "INTRO" to activate it.
Last 10 fault view through display

When entering the LAST FAULT menu, there are 10 submenus with the following text:
Fault 1 is the most recent one and 10 the oldest one. By entering any of them through
INTRO the data of the corresponding fault can be seen.
FAULT No. n
DATA TIME
When entering fault 1, fault is allowed to be recognised (switch off leds, etc). But it does not
occur with the remaining faults.
By pushing ESC the previous level is accessed.
Last fault automatic display

When there is a trip, the beginning of the fault report appears in the display, so, if pushing ↓
, you can get access to all the information.
If the fault is recognised or ESC is pushed, the first screen with the relay description is
accessed.
Idle status without pulses

If no key is pushed for 5 minutes, the relay moves back to the idle screen. The screen
displayed in this situation can be configured. By pushing the keys “↵” and “ESC” at the
same time; the screen that is being displayed changes into idle screen. If the key ESC is
pushed, the idle screen changes again into the relay description.
7.2 USING THE PC

The PD300 protection relays can be monitorized through a PC. That way, you can get access to the measurement and system
setting displaying, as well as to their programming.
The PC program, Protection Console Developer by Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution SA is called SIPCON/P.

RECEPTION, STORAGE, INSTALLATION AND TESTS 
8. RECEPTION, STORAGE, INSTALLATION AND TESTS
8.1 RECEPTION AND STORAGE

The protections are supplied in special packing material for transport.
Upon reception, they should be checked for any signs of external damage caused during transport; if so the transport firm and
manufacturer should be contacted.
The material received should also be checked to see if it coincides with the order number.
If the protection is not going to be used immediately, it should be stored in its original packaging and in a dry and dirt free
place.
The unit transport must be made in its original packaging.
8.2 CONNECTING PROCEDURE

The protection connecting procedure should be carried out in accordance with the enclosed external connection diagram. It is
a general diagram; the programming of inputs and outputs should be taken into consideration in each specific case.
Power supply
The polarity is indifferent.
Earth connection
It is important for the earth connection to be correctly connected, in order for the protection disturbance rejection devices it
incorporates to operate properly. The connection should be as short as possible (less than 25 cm.) using multiwired cable
2
with a 4 mm cross-section.
RS232 cable connections to be used between the PC and the PL300 unit
Case 1: a 25-pin PC output connector:
PD300 side PC side
Female 9-pin socket female 25-pin socket
RxD 2 2 TxD
TxD 3 3 RxD
GND 5 7 GND
DSR 6 20 DTR
RTS 7 8 CD
CTS 8 5 CTS
CD 1 4 RTS
DTR 4 6 DSR

Case 2: a 9-pin PC output connector

PD300 side PC side
Female 9-pin socket female 9-pin socket
RxD 2 3 TxD
TxD 3 2 RxD
GND 5 5 GND
DSR 6 4 DTR
RTS 7 1 CD
CTS 8 8 CTS
CD 1 7 RTS
DTR 4 6 DSR
8.3 UNIT ADDRESSING

See “Communications configuration” section.
8.4 COMMISSIONING
The PL300 protections are received with the default settings stipulated by the factory.
Before commissioning they must be set, through the keyboard/display and/or PC, with the correct values for the application,
following the setting procedures.
The protection has been checked at the factory in order to guarantee its accuracy in all of the setting points of the different
parameters. However, it is convenient to test some points during reception and commissioning, in order to ensure it is totally
in proper operating condition.
Once the line is connected the real measurements the relay is carrying out can be displayed, thus enabling you to check for
proper connection and operation.

DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT CALCULATION 
APPENDIX I. DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT CALCULATION

The differential and restraint current measurement of each phase depends on the fact that if it as a 2 or 3 winding model. The
settings used are those mentioned the “Unit configuration” section.
The differential current used in each phase protection functions matches the following formula:
I1 I I
I _ dif = ⋅ C1 + 2 ⋅ C 2 + 3 ⋅ C3
Tap1 Tap 2 Tap3
Where:
I1, I2, I3 correspond to each winding currents compensated according the wiring procedure
Tap1, Tap2, Tap3 correspond to each winding restraint currents.
C1, C2, C3 It shows the wiring compensation (1 ó 1/√3 ) of each winding (tables 1 and 2)
The viewed differential current (state, fault, display...) refers to the winding selected by the “Winding selection” setting, where
Tapn shows the de through current of this winding (I_difref). In case “None” is selected, the viewed differential current is I_dif.
I1 I I
I _ dif ref = Tap n ⋅ ( ⋅ C1 + 2 ⋅ C 2 + 3 ⋅ C3 )
Tap1 Tap 2 Tap3
Winding current
In tables 3, 4 and 5 the current calculation regarding the wiring and the timetable code is shown. These calculations match the
ABC phase sequence, in case of using ACB all the equations resulting C times B and B times C.
When entering a table having a code as difference between H2 and H3, in case the subtraction is negative, 12 must be added
before entering the table.
Through current or “tap”.

It is introduce by means of setting or it is calculated from the winding data. Each winding tap calculation (n) from the setting is
the following:
If the “Power maximum capacity” setting is different to 0

TAPn = MVA·1000 / (RTIn · KVn · √3)
where n shows the winding
RTI: transformer winding ratio
KV: Winding nominal phase to phase voltage
The obtained tap value must be between the limits:
0.5 to 100A for In=5A
0.1 to 20 for In=1A
Otherwise, it will be fixed in the maximum if the result is higher or in the minimum if it is lower.
If the “Power maximum capacity” setting is 0
TAPn is the “Winding through current” setting.
Monopole filter
The homopole filter can be enabled by setting.
No. The homopole filter is not applied

Yes. It is applied when a homopole sequence current can flow through one of the windings (star), but not through the other
(delta). In these cases the external faults to ground can cause a wrong operation of the differential unit. It is avoid by
subtracting (filtering) in the differential current components the homopole sequence of he wiring groups needed (although
it is never damaging). The current of each phase is:
Ia = Ia – (Ia + Ib + Ic)/3

Ib = Ib – (Ia + Ib + Ic)/3
Ic = Ic – (Ia + Ib + Ic)/3
In. It is only applied to 2 winding models. It is the same as in the previous case, but instead off using the homopole current, it
uses the neutral current. The neutral transformer must be associated to that winding
I.1. 2-WINDING MODELS

The wiring procedures and the timetable codes allowed to each one are shown in this table
Table 1. 2-winding wiring procedures

Winding 1 Winding 2 Timetable code C1 C2
Y y 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 1 1
Y d 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 1/√3 1
Y z 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 1/√3 1
D y 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 1 1/√3
D d 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 1 1
D z 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 1 1
Z y 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 1 1/√3
Z d 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 1 1
Z z 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 1 1
Restraint current:
I1 I
⋅ C1 + 2 ⋅ C 2
Tap1 Tap2
I restra int_ 2 w =
2
The calculation for each of the wiring procedures is shown in the following lines:
GROUP Yy
In this wiring procedure, each phase current refers to the primary, taking into account the transformation due to the wiring
procedure type.
Winding 1 currents: each phase measurement with homopole filter.

Winding 2 currents: according to table 4 with timetable code H and homopole filter.
GROUPS Yd, Yz
In these wiring each phase current refers to the secondary, taking into account the transformation due to the wiring procedure
type.
Winding 1 currents: according to table 3 with timetable code H. The homopole filter is not affected.
Winding 2 currents: each phase measurement with homopole filter
GROUPS Dy, Zy
In these wiring each phase current refers to the primary, taking into account the transformation due to the wiring procedure
type.

Winding 2 currents: according to table 5 with timetable code H. The homopole filter does not affect.
GROUPS Dd, Dz, Zd, Zz

In these wiring each phase current refers to the primary, taking into account the transformation due to the wiring procedure
type.

Winding 2 currents: according to table 4 with timetable code H and homopole filter.

I.2. 3-WINDING MODELS

The wiring procedures and the timetable codes allowed for each one is shown in the following table:
Table 2. 3-winding wiring procedures

Winding 1 Winding 2 Winding 3 Timetable code 2 Timetable code 3 C1 C2 C3
Y y y 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 1 1 1
Y y d 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 1/√3 1/√3 1
Y d y 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 1/√3 1 1/√3
Y d d 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 1/√3 1 1
D y y 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 1 1/√3 1/√3
D y d 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 1 1/√3 1
D d y 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 1 1 1/√3
D d d 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 1 1 1
Restraint current:
I1 I I
⋅ C1 + 2 ⋅ C 2 + 3 ⋅ C 3
Tap1 Tap2 Tap3
I restra int_ 3w =
2
The calculation for each of the wiring procedure is shown below:
GROUP Yyy
Winding 2 currents: according to table 4 with timetable code H2 and with homopole filter.
GROUP Yyd
Winding 1 currents: according to table 3 with timetable code H3.
Winding 2 currents: according to table 3 with timetable code H3-H2.
GROUP Ydy
Winding 1 currents 1: according to table 3 with timetable code H2.
Winding 3 currents: according to table 5 with timetable code H3-H2
GROUP Ydd
Winding 1 currents according to table 3 with timetable code H2.
Winding 2 currents each phase measurement with homopole filter.
Winding 3 currents: according to table 4 with timetable code H3- H2 and with homopole filter.
GROUP Dyy
GROUP Dyd
Winding 2currents: according to table 5 with timetable code H2.

GROUP Ddy
GROUP Ddd
TABLE 3 Group Yd, Yz

Timetable code Reference Winding Modified Winding Modified winding
A
A
C A’ = A-C
1 B’ = B-A
C’ = C-B
C B
A’ = B-C
3 B’ = C-A
""
A C’ = A-B
B A’ = B-A
5 B’ = C-B
""
C’ = A-C
A’ = C-A
7 B’ = A-B
""
C C’ = B-C
A A’ = C-B
9 B’ = A-C
""
C’ = B-A
A’ = A-B
11 B’ = B-C
""
B C’ = C-A

TABLE 4 Group Yy, Dd, Dz, Zd, Zz

A A
A’ = A
0 B’ = B
C’ = C
C B C B
C A
A’ = -B
2 B’ = -C
""
C’ = -A
B
C
A’ = C
4 B’ = A
""
C’ = B
B A
B C
A’ = -A
6 B’ = -B
""
C’ = -C
A
B
A’ = B
8 B’ = C
""
C’ = A
A C
A B
A’ = -C
10 B’ = -A
""
C’ = -B
C

TABLE 5 Group Dy, Zy

A
A
C A’ = A-B
1 B’ = B-C
C’ = C-A
C B
A’ = C-B
3 B’ = A-C
""
A C’ = B-A
B A’ = C-A
5 B’ = A-B
""
C’ = B-C
A’ = B-A
7 B’ = C-B
""
C C’ = A-C
A A’ = B-C
9 B’ = C-A
""
C’ = A-B
A’ = A-C
11 B’ = B-A
""
B C’ = C-B

GENERATOR PROTECTION 
APPENDIX II. GENERATOR PROTECTION

The generator protection works as a 2-winding protection, but with some conditions in the following functions:
Percent and instantaneous differential protection

The harmonic restraint is disabled in the generator applications.
There is an additional setting for the enabling of the frequency differential protection inhibition:
Parameter Min. Max. Step Notes

Frequency filter enable YES/NO
Percent and instantaneous differential protection operation according to this setting is the following one:
With the frequency filter enabled: it only operates within the frequency range ±5 Hz of the nominal frequency (45 to 55 for 50
Hz and 55 to 65 for 60), so the phase voltage connection is necessary for the frequency measurement (see wiring
diagram).
With the frequency filter not enabled: it operates regardless of the frequency measurement.
The percent differential protection settings are those below:

Enable YES/NO
Sensitivity (xTap) 0.02 2 0.01 See note
Istep 1 (xTap) 0 2 0.01
I step 2 (xTap) 0 20 0.01
α1 (%) 5 100 1
α2 (%) 5 200 1
The percent differential protection settings are those below:
Enable Minimum Maximum Step YES/NO

Enable YES/NO
Trip (xTap) 0.6 4 0.01
Note: The sensitivity value must fulfil that:

Tapmin imum ·Sensitivity ≥ 0.02·In
Being In the current rate (5A). Otherwise, the sensitivity value is automatically modified in order to fulfil it.
The sensitivity and restraint currents are indicated in tap steps.
Restricted earth
The restricted earth protection settings are those below:

Enable YES/NO
Trip (A) 0.05 4 0.01
Comparation winding Wind 1, Wind 2 or Autotrafo
General settings for the differential protections

When applying to a generator, the following must be taken into account:
The winding 2 nominal voltage is the same as the winding 1 nominal voltage.
The connection type for both windings is “Y”.
The schedule code is “0”.
The single-pole enabling for both windings is “NO”.

GENERATOR PROTECTION 
Thermal image
The setting range of the nominal current is from 0.04A to 10A with 0.01A step.
Measurements
The measurement range for a 5A nominal current is 0.02A at 32A, being the measurement background scale 32A.
In the control measurements (see “Available signals” appendix), the background of the phase current of each winding is 1,2*In ,
while the last fault current one is 32A.
Available signals
The digital signals and commands will be those indicated in the available signal appendix, except those corresponding to the
non-available functions in the generator models.
2nd and 5th harmonic restraint

Pickup / Trip restricted earth unit 1 and 2
Winding 3 signals

KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY 
APPENDIX III. KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY

In the following pages we enclose a table, which graphically illustrates and shows the easy handling of the different menus and
settings, which can be changed with the keyboard/display. We recommend this appendix be at hand when you start to use the
keyboard, in order to find, in a easy way the settings to be changed.
The structure is generic for all the PD300 family group, that is, it does not correspond to only a certain model. In each model,
only the setting and measurements related to its available functions will appear.
The format used is the following one:
Common to all the models
2 winding models and generator
3 winding models
Generator models
Models with battery measurement
The rear protocol menu, accessible from “see setting” and “change setting”, corresponds to the one selected as rear protocol, the
remaining ones are not displayed.
DATE/TIME (see) Units date and time are visualized.
See ACTIVE TABLE Present active table
INPUTS INPUTS STATUS Status of inputs 1 to 3
(4 to 9) Status of inputs 4 to 9
(10 to 15) Status of inputs 10 to 15
(16, 17) Status of inputs 16 and 17
MEASUREMENTS See measurement page
STATISTICAL DATA See statistical data page
LAST FAULTS See last fault page
SETTINGS (see) See setting page
SETTINGS (change) See change setting page

APPLIED TO:
MEASUREMENT WIND. 1 MEASURE. CURRENTS Phase A W1 current Winding 1 phase A current
Phase B W1 current Winding 1 phase B current
Phase C W1 current Winding 1 phase C current
W1 (A) average current Winding 1 phase average current
MAXIMETER MAXIMETER 1 (A) Winding 1 maximum average current
ZERO DATE Date when the maximeter is set to 0
THERMAL IMAGE WIND. 1 THERMAL IMAGE Winding 1 thermal image
WIND.2 MEASURE. CURRENTS Phase A W2 current Winding 21 phase A current
W2 (A) average current Winding 2 phase average current
WINDING 3 MEASURE. CURRENTS Phase A W3 current Winding 3 phase A current
W 3 (A) average current Winding 3 phase average current
NEUTRAL MEASUREM Neutral current 1 (A) Neutral current 1
Neutral current 2 (A) Neutral current 2
DIF. MEASUREMENT Curr FUNDAMENTAL Curr Dif. A Fundamental harmonic phase A differential current
Curr Dif. B Fundamental harmonic phase B differential current
Curr Dif. C Fundamental harmonic phase C differential current
Curr. ARMON 2/2+4. Curr Dif. A 2ND harmonic phase A differential current
Curr Dif. B 2ND harmonic phase B differential current
Curr Dif. C 2ND harmonic phase C differential current
Curr. ARMON 5 Curr Dif. A 5TH harmonic phase A differential current
Curr Dif. B 5TH harmonic phase B differential current
Curr Dif. C 5TH harmonic phase C differential current
Curr RESTRAINT Curr Dif. A Phase A restraint current
Curr Dif. B Phase B restraint current
Curr Dif. C Phase C restraint current
VOLTAGE MEASURE VOLTAGE V Voltage measurement
FREQUEN. MEASURE FREQUENCY (Hz) Frequency measurement
TEMPERATURE (ºC) TEMPERATURE (ºC) Unit temperature in ºC

APPLIED TO:
STATISTICAL DATA WIND1 OPENINGS Winding 1total opening counter
WIND2 OPENINGS Winding 2 total opening counter
WIND3 OPENINGS Winding 3 total opening counter
WIND1 TRIPS Winding 1total trip counter
WIND2 TRIPS Winding 2 total trip counter
WIND3 TRIPS Winding 3 total trip counter
WINDING 1 SIGMA K12 Winding 1 sigma K12
TEMPERATUR.1 Acknow. Winding 1 temperature reset
LAST FAULT Fault no. LAST FAULT PHASE Phase/s involved in the last fault
Winding1 fault A current
Winding1 fault B current
Winding1 fault C current
Neutral 1 fault current
Neutral 2 fault current
Fault voltage
Current dif fault A

Current dif fault B
Current dif fault C
Current rest fault A
Current rest fault B
Current rest fault C
START D
END D
FAULT acknowledge

APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (see) SEE TABLE 1 PROTECTION GENERERAL PROTEC. TRANSF CHARACT WIND.1 V. Winding 1 nominal voltage transformation ratio
WIND2 V. Winding 2 nominal voltage transformation ratio
WIND.3 V. Winding 1 nominal voltage transformation ratio
V.T.R. Auxiliary voltage transformation ratio, measurements
TRANSFORM RATIO W1 TRAFO Winding 1 current transformation ratio
W2 TRAFO Winding 2 current transformation ratio
W3 TRAFO. Winding 3 current transformation ratio
G1 TRAFO Neutral 1 transformation ratio
G2 TRAFO Neutral 2 transformation ratio
TRANSF. CONNECT W1 CONNECT Winding 1 transformer connection type
ENA. HOMOP W1 Enable winding 1 homopole transformer
W2 CONNECT Winding 2 transformer connection type
W2 TIME CODE Winding 2 time code
W3 CONNECT Winding 3 transformer connection type
W3 TIME CODE Winding 3 time code
NUMBER OF WINDINGS 2/3 winding connection
WINDINGS NOM CUR MAX.POWER. (MVA) Maximum power capacity(MVA)
WIND1 RESTRAINT CURR. Winding 1 restraint current
FUNCTION 86 ENABLE FUNC. 86 Enable function 86
FREQUENCY FILTER ENABLE Enable frequency filter ( generator)

APPLIED TO:
WINDING 1
SETTINGS (see) SEE TABLE 1 PROTECTION PHASE TOC ENABLE TIME PR.. Enable phase timing
PROTECTION
PICK UP. Pick up phase timing
CURVE SHAPE Curve shape phase timing.
TIME INDEX Time index phase timing
FIXED TIME Fixed time phase timing
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking phase timing .
RESIDUAL TOC. ENABLE TIME PR.. Enable residual timing
PICK UP. Pick up residual timing
CURVE SHAPE Curve shape residual timing.
TIME INDEX Time index residual timing
FIXED TIME Fixed time residual timing
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking residual timing .
PHASE IOC ENABLE INSTANT. Enable phase instantaneous
PICK UP INSTANT. Pick up phase instantaneous
ADDITIONAL TIME Fixed time phase instantaneous
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking phase instantaneous
RESIDUAL IOC ENABLE INSTANT. Enable residual instantaneous
PICK UP INSTANT. Pick up residual instantaneous
ADDITIONAL TIME Fixed time residual instantaneous
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking residual instantaneous
IOC .HIGH PHASES IOC HIGH ENABLEINSTANT. Enable level 2 phase instantaneous
PICK UP INSTANT. Pick up level 2 phase instantaneous
ADDITIONAL TIME Fixed time level 2 phase instantaneous
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking level 2 phase instantaneous
INST..RESID. HIGH ENABLE INSTANT. Enable level 2 residual instantaneous
PICK UP INSTANT. Pick up level 2 residual instantaneous
ADDITIONAL TIME Fixed time level 2 residual instantaneous
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking level 2 residual instantaneous
UNBALANCE TOC ENABLE TIME PR.. Enable unbalance timing
PICK UP. Pick up unbalance timing
CURVE SHAPE Curve shape unbalance timing.
TIME INDEX Time index unbalance timing
FIXED TIME Fixed time unbalance timing
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking unbalance timing
UNBALANCE IOC ENABLE INSTANT. Enable unbalance instantaneous
PICK UP INSTANT. Pickup unbalance instantaneous
ADDITIONAL TIME Fixed time unbalance instantaneous
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking unbalance instantaneous
THERM. IMAGE
THERMAL IMAGE Enable thermal image
ENABLE.
HEATING CONSTANT. Heating constant thermal image
COOLING CONSTANT. Cooling constant thermal image
ALARM TRESHOLD Alarm threshold thermal image
BASE CURRENT Base current (In)
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking thermal image
BREAKER
BREAKER FAIL ENABLE Enable breaker failure
FAILURE..
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking breaker failure
PHASES RESTORE Restore breaker failure phases
GROUND RESTORE Restore breaker failure neutral
RETRIP FIXED T Retrip time breaker failure
TRIP FIXED T Trip time breaker failure

APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (see) SEE TABLE 1 PROTECTION WINDING 2 PROTECTION PHASE TOC ENABLE TIME PR.. Enable phase timing

IOC .HIGH PHASES IOC HIGH ENABLE INSTANT. Enable level 2 phase instantaneous
THERMAL IMAGE THERMAL IMAGE ENABLE. Enable thermal image
BREAKER FAILURE.. BREAKER FAIL ENABLE Enable breaker failure
TRIP FIXED TIME Trip fixed time breaker failure

APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (see) SEE TABLE 1 PROTECTION WINDING 3 PROTECTION PHASE TOC ENABLE TIME PR.. Enable phase timing
IOC .HIGH PHASES IOC HIGH ENABLE INSTANT. Enable level 2 phase instantaneous
THERMAL IMAGE THERMAL IMAGE ENABLE. Enable thermal image
BREAKER FAILURE.. BREAKER FAIL ENABLE Enable breaker failure
TRIP FIXED TIME Trip fixed time breaker failure

APPLIED TO
SETTINGS (see) SEE TABLE 1 PROTECTION GROUND PROT. RESTRICT EARTH 1 ENABLE Enable restricted earth unit1
PICK-UP Pick up restricted earth unit1
ADDITIONAL TIME Additional time restricted earth unit1
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking restricted earth unit1
COMPARA WINDING Comparation winding restricted earth unit1
RESTRICT EARTH 2 ENABLE Enable restricted earth unit2
PICK-UP Pick up restricted earth unit2
ADDITIONAL TIME Additional time restricted earth unit2
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking restricted earth unit2
COMPARA WINDING Comparation winding restricted earth unit2
GROUND 1 TOC ENABLE TIME PR. Enable timing neutral 1
PICK-UP Pick-up timing neutral 1
CURVE SHAPE Curve shape timing neutral 1
TIME INDEX Time index timing overI neutral 1
FIXED TIME Fixed time timing neutral 1
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking timing neutral 1
GROUND 2 TOC ENABLE TIME PR. Enable timing neutral 2
PICK-UP. Pick-up timing neutral 2
CURVE SHAPE Curve shape timing neutral 2
TIME INDEX Time index timing overI neutral 2
FIXED TIME Fixed time timing neutral 2
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking timing neutral 2
GROUND 1 IOC ENABLE INSTANT Enable level 1 instantaneous neutral 1
PICK-UP INSTANT. Pickup level 1 instantaneous neutral 1
ADDITIONAL TIME Fixed time 1 instantaneous neutral 1
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking level 1 instantaneous neutral 1
GROUND 2 IOC ENABLE INSTANT Enable level 1 instantaneous neutral 2
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking level 1 instantaneous neutral 2
GROUND IOC HIGH GROUND IOC 1 ENABLE INSTANT Enable level 2 instantaneous neutral 1
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking input level 2 instantaneous neutral 1
GROUND IOC 2 ENABLE INSTANT Enable level 2 instantaneous neutral 2
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking input level 2 instantaneous neutral 2

APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (see) SEE TABLE 1 PROTECTION DIFFERENTIAL PROT. PERCENT DIFF ENABLE Enable differential
SENSITIVITY xIn Sensitivity (xIn)
RESTRAINT 1 xIn Restraint current 1
RESTRAINT 2 xIn Restraint current 2
Slope α1 (%) Slope 1 (%)
Slope α2 (%) Slope 2(%)
ADDITIONAL TIME Additional time percent differential l
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking percent differential
INSTANT DIFF ENABLE INSTANT Enable instantaneous differential
PICK UP xIn Pickup instantaneous differential
ADDITIONAL TIME Additional timing instantaneous differential
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking instantaneous
INRUSH RESTRAINT INRUSH ENABLE INRUSH restraint enable
INRUSH LEVEL (%) INRUSH restraint level
INRUSH THRESHOLD Minimum fundamental current (A)
OVEREXCIT. RESTRAINT. OVEREXCIT.ENABLE Overexcitation restraint enable
OVEREXCI. LEVEL.(%) Overexcitation restraint level
OVEREXC. THRESHOLD Minimum fundamental current (A)
ADDITIONAL PR. FRECUEN. MIN/MAX STEP FREQUENCY. 1 FREQUENCY ENABLE Enable frequency step 1
FREQUENCY (HZ) Frequency step 1
ADDITIONAL TIME Time frequency step 1
FREQUENCY TYPE Frequency type frequency step 1
STEP FREQUENCY 2 FREQUENCY ENABLE Enable frequency step 2
STEP FREQUENCY. 3 FREQUENCY ENABLE Enable frequency step 3
GENERALS OF FREQ. BLOCKING SIGNAL Frequency blocking (generic)
MIN VOLTAGE SPV. Supervision minimum voltage
PICKUP CYCLES No. Number of frequency pickup cycle
OVERVOLTAGE ENABLE Enable overvoltage
PICKUP Overvoltage pickup threshold s
ADDITIONAL TIME Overvoltage fixed time
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking overvoltage
INST. OVERVOLTAGE ENABLE Enable overvoltage
PICKUP Overvoltage pickup threshold s
ADDITIONAL TIME Overvoltage fixed time
TIME UNDERVOLTAGE ENABLE Enable undervoltage
PICKUP Undervoltage pickup threshold
CURVE Undervoltage curve time
INDEX Time index. Undervoltage
ADDITIONAL TIME Undervoltage fixed time
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking undervoltage
INST. UNDERVOLTAGE ENABLE Enable undervoltage
PICKUP Undervoltage pickup threshold
ADDITIONAL TIME Undervoltage fixed time
5 HARM OVEREXC ENABLE Enable overexcitation 5 harmonic
MINMIMUM CURRENT Operation minimum current(xIn)
PICK UP Pickup threshold (%)
ADDITIONAL TIME Fixed time overexcitation 5 harmonic
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking overexcitation 5 harmonic

APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (see) SEE TABE 1 PROTECTION ADDITIONAL PROT V/f OVEREXC. 1 ENABLE Enable V/f overexcitation unit 1
OPER MINIMUM V Operation minimum voltage
PICK UP Pickup threshold V/f overexcitation unit 1
CURVE TYPE Unit 1 V/f curve type
TIME INDEX Unit 1 V/f time index
ADDITIONAL TIME Fixed time V/f overexcitation unit 1
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking V/f overexcitation unit 1
V/f OVEREXC. 2 ENABLE Enable V/f overexcitation unit 2
OPER MINIMUM V Operation minimum voltage
PICK UP Pick up threshold V/f overexcitation unit 2
CURVE TYPE Unit 2 V/f curve type
TIME INDEX Unit 2 V/f time index
ADDITIONAL TIME Fixed time V/f overexcitation unit 2
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking V/f overexcitation unit 2
WINDING SELECT WINDING SELECT Selection reference winding
OPERATION LOGIC SPV.INTER.WIND1 TRIP LATCH Trip latch breaker 1
OPEN FAIL T. Open failure timing (sec)breaker 1
CLOSE LATCH Close latch breaker 1
CLOSE FAIL T Close failure timing (sec)breaker 1
K12 SUM TRESHOLD KI2 alarm threshold breaker 1
INITIAL K12 SUM Sum KI2 initial value breaker 1
CALCULATION TYPE Sum KI2 calculation type
WAITING TIME Waiting time after trip
SPV.INTER.WIND2 TRIP LATCH Trip latch breaker 2
SPV.INTER.WIND. 3 TRIP LATCH Trip latch breaker 3
WINDING SUPERV TRIP 1 CI SPV EN Enable the winding 1 trip circuit supervision
CLOS 1 CI SPV EN Enable the winding 1 close circuit supervision
TRIP 2 CI SPV EN Enable the winding 2 trip circuit supervision
TRIP 3 CI SPV EN Enable the winding 3 trip circuit supervision
HISTORICALS WINDOW for AVERAG Time window sample average calculation
RECORDING INTERV Historical recording interval
CALENDAR MASK. Calendar mask for week days
START TIME Daily register initial time
END TIME Daily register end time

APPLIED FOR:
SETTINGS (see) SEE TABLE 2 Same as table 1
SEE TABLE 3 Same as table 1
SETTINGS (see) SEE TABLE 0 CONFIGURE I/O CONFIG.INPUTS INPUTS Input configuration
SELECT. NO/NC See NO/NC inputs
ACTIVATION TIME ACTIVATION TIME Input activation time
OUTPUTS OUTPUT Nº SIGNALS Output configuration signals
OUTPUT TYPE Output type configuration
OUTPUT ACTIV. TIME ACTIV TIME Snº Output activation time (new)
LEDS LED nº SIGNALS Programmable LEDs configuration
MEMORIZEDO LED type configuration
GENERALS RELAY SERVICE Relay in service
BREAKER NUMBER Breaker number
COMUNICATIONS PROTOCOL.COM2 PROTOCL.COM2 See select rear communication type
PORT COM1 UCL ADDRESS Protection address
BAUD RATE Baud rate (bauds)
TYPE OF PARITY Parity
STOP BITS Stop bit number
PORT COM2 (PROCOME) UCL ADDRESS Protection address
(if Procome) BAUD RATE Baud rate (bauds)
STOP BITS Stop bit number
CONTROL SIGNALS None / RTS
PORT COM2 (DNP) UCL ADDRESS UCL address for DNP communications.
(if DNP) MASTER DIRECTION Master address for DNP communications.
BAUD RATE Baud rate in DNP communications
TYPE OF PARITY Parity in DNP communications
STOP BITS Stop bits for DNP communications.
RTS FIXED Channel type for DNP communications
COMMUN. CONTROL RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS. WAIT T. (sec) CTS waiting time for DNP
POR. WAIT T (sec) CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications
STABILI. T (sec) Stabilization time for DNP communications
ACK.WAIT T (sec) Waiting time confirm. Link for DNP
SYNCHRON T (sec) Synchronization time for DNP communications
ACK. LINK Link confirm. for DNP communications
APPLIC.M. BYTES N.. Application messages bytes number for DNP
CHANGES T. Change sending time for DNP communications
FROZEN T. Counter frozen time for DNP
STATUS SENDING Status sending for DNP communications
MESURES BITS N. Measurement format for DNP communications
COUNTERS BITS N. Counter format for DNP communications
NOT REQUESTED MSG Not requested message sending for DNP
PREV.COLLISION Collision prevision for DNP communications
COL. FIXED T.. (sec) Collision fixed time for DNP communications
COL. VBLE.. T. (sec) Collision variable time for DNP
RESENDING T Non-requested message resending time for DNP
NOT REQUEST MAX NUM. Maximum number of non-requested messages for DNP.
ESPECIAL Especial for DNP communications
MEASURES FORMAT Measurement format for DNP communications

APPLIED FOR:
SETTINGS (see) SEE TABLE 0 CONFIG.COMMUNI. REAR PORT (MOD-BUS) UCL ADDRESS UCL address
(if MOD-BUS) BAUD RATE Communication baud rate
PARITY TYPE parity
RTS. ACT. WAIT T. RTS activation waiting time
CARRIER WAIT T. Carrier waiting time
RTS. DEACT. WAIT T. RTS deactivation waiting time
MEASURE FORM MOD.BUS Measurement format for MOD-BUS communication
PORT COM2 (101) GENERALS LINK ADDRESS Remote station number at link level
(if 101) APPLIC. ADDRESS Remote station number at application level
BALANCED Communication in balanced mode or not
BAUD RATE Baud rate
CHANNEL TYPE Communication channel type
RTS AND CTS RTS and CTS control
STOP BITS Stop bits
CTS. WAIT T. (sec) CTS waiting time
POR. WAIT T (sec) Carrier waiting time
RTS ACTIV TIME Waiting time after RTS
RTS DEACTIV TIME Waiting time to deactivate RTS
RESP. WAIT TIME Waiting time to confirm received message
TIME BETWEEN
Time between two transmissions
TRANSM.
TRANS. NUMBER Number of transmission attempts
APLIC. ADDRESS
ASDU FIELDS Number of application address bytes
LENGTH
CAA LENGTH Number of link address bytes
COT LENGTH Number of bytes due to transmission
IOA LENGTH Number of bytes of information field
FORMATS TIME FORMAT Time format
TIME MEASUREMENTS Measurement sending with time
TIME COUNTER Counter sending with time
Address of the first information object simple signal
ADDRESSES SP ADDRESS
type
EV ADDRESS Address of the first information object event type
Address of the first information object double
DP ADDRESS
signal type
Address of the first information object
MEAS ADDRESS
measurement type
TAP ADDRESS Address of the first information object TAP type
COUN ADDRESS Address of the first information object counter type
BIT ADDRESS Address of the first information object bitstring type
Address of the first information object simple order
OC ADDRESS
type C
Address of the first information object simple order
OC0 ADDRESS
type CO
Address of the first information object double order
OC1 ADDRESS
type C1
Address of the first information object double order
OC2 ADDRESS
type C2
Address of the first informat. object measurement
PAR ADDRESS
parameter
FULL ADDRESS Address signalling the queue is full
HALF- FULL ADDRESS Address signalling the queue is half-full
GPS ADDRESS Address signalling GPS
SYNCHR. ADDRESS Address signalling GPS synchronization

APPLIED FOR:
SETTINGS (see) SEE TABLE 0 COMMUNICATIONS PORT COM2 (101) OTHER PARAMETERS % FULLING Fulling limit to activate the fulling alarm
(if 101) % EMPTYING Emptying limit to deactivate the fulling alarm
WORD EVENTS Start word for the event state refreshment
COMMAND MODE Command execution mode
COMMAND INFORMT Sending of command return information
FREEZE Periodical counter operation mode
Same address for measurements and for
MEAS. PAR. ADDRESS
measurement parameters
META PROFILE. Meta reduced profile
GPS GPS installation
TRANSMIS. FACTOR Transmission factor time
ASDU SIZE Maximum number of bytes in the ASDU
BIT SQ Sending of compacted messages
COM2 PORT UCL ADDRESS UCL address
(If 103) BAUD RATE Baud rate
PARITY T. Parity
STOP BITS Number of stop bits
RTS ACT. T RTS activation waiting time
CARR. T. Carrier waiting time
RTS DEACT. T. Waiting time to deactivate RTS
SEND FORMAT Compatible VDEW/Extended
SEL COM TCP/IP SEL COM TCP/IP Select the protocol of the Ethernet Port
DEFINE DEVICE LANGUAGE See language
SUPPLY FREQUENCY See supply frequency
PHASE ORDER Phase order
PUSHBUTTONS ENABLE PUSHBUTTONS Enable pushbuttons
LOCKING BY COMMAND Locking by command
SUPPLY SURVEILLANCE Enable supply surveillance
EXT. SUPPLY SURVEILLANCE. ENABLE Enable external supply surveillance
ALAR. MIN. THRESHOLD Alarm minimum threshold
ALAR. MAX. THRESHOLD Alarm maximum threshold
TEMPERAT. SURVEILLANCE ENABLE Temperature surveillance
ALAR. MIN. THRESHOLD Alarm minimum threshold
ALAR. MAX. THRESHOLD Alarm maximum threshold
FORMAT IRIG-B FORMAT IRIG-B Select Irig-B format

APPLIED FOR:
SETTINGS (change) CHANGE DATE CHANGE DATE Change date
CHANGE TIME Change time
NEW PAR VALID? Valid date and time change
ACTIVATE TABLE ACTIVATE TABLE 1 Activate table 1
ACTIVATE TABLE 2 Activate table 2
ACTIVATE TABLE5 Activate table 5
PROGRAM TABLE 1 PROTECTION GENERALS OF PROTEC TRANSF CHARACTER WIND. 1. V Winding 1 nominal voltage transformation ratio?
WIND. 2 V Winding 2 nominal voltage transformation ratio?
WIND. 3. V Winding 3 nominal voltage transformation ratio?
V.T.R- Auxiliar voltage transformation ratio ,measurement?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid voltage transformer setting?
TRANSF RATIO W1. TRAFO Winding 1 current transformation ratio?
W2. TRAFO Winding 2 current transformation ratio?
W3. TRAFO Winding 3 current transformation ratio?
G1 TRAFO Ground 1 transformation ratio?
G2 TRAFO Ground 2 transformation ratio?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid transformation ratio?
TRANSF CONNECT W1 CONNECTION Winding 1 transformer connection type?
ENA HOMOP W1 Enable homopole winding 1 transformer?
W2 CONNECTION Connection type winding 2 transformer?
W2 TIME CODE Winding 2-time code?
W3 CONNECTION Ti Connection type winding 3 transformer?
W3 TIME CODE Winding 3 time code?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid trafo connection?
WINDING NOMI. CURR MAX. (MVA) Maximum power capacity (MVA)?
W1 STEP C Winding 1 step current?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid winding nominal current (tap)?
FUNCTION 86 ENA.FUNC. 86 Enable function 86?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid function 86 settings
FREQUENCY FILTER ENABLE Enable frequency filter ( generator)
NEW PAR VALID? Valid function 86 setting?

APPLIED TO
SETTINGS (change) PROGRAM TABLE 1 PROTECTION WIND1 PROTECTION PHASE TOC ENABLE Enable phase timing?
PICK UP Pick up phase timing?
CURVE SHAPE Curve shape phase timing?
TIME INDEX Curve index phase timing?
FIXED TIME Fixed time phase timing?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking phase timing??
NEW PAR VALID? Valid settings?
RESIDUAL TOC ENABLE Enable residual timing?
PICK UP Pick up residual timing?
CURVE SHAPE Curve shape residual timing?
TIME INDEX Curve index residual timing?
FIXED TIME Fixed time residual timing?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking residual timing??
NEW PAR VALID? Valid residual timing settings?
PHASES IOC ENABLE Enable phase instantaneous?
PICK UP Pick up phase instantaneous?
ADD.TIME Fixed time phase instantaneous?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking phase instantaneous?
RESIDUAL IOC ENABLE Enable level 1 residual instantaneous?
PICK UP Pickup level 1 residual instantaneous?
ADD.TIME Fixed time level 1 residual instantaneous?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking level 1 residual instantaneous?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid residual instantaneous settings?
HIGH IOC INST..FASES HIGH ENABLE Enable level 2 phase instantaneous?
PICK UP Pickup level 2 phase instantaneous?
ADDITIONAL TIME Fixed time level 2 phase instantaneous?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking level 2 phase instantaneous?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid phase instantaneous settings?
INST.RESID.HIGH ENABLE Enable level 2 residual instantaneous?
ADDITIONAL TIME Fixed time level 2 residual instantaneous?
UNBALANCE TOC ENABLE Enable unbalance timing?
PICK UP Pick up unbalance timing?
CURVE SHAPE Curve shape unbalance timing?
TIME INDEX Time index unbalance timing?
FIXED TIME Fixed time unbalance timing?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking unbalance timing?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid unbalance timing setting?
UNBALANCE IOC ENABLE Enable unbalance instantaneous?
PICK UP Pick up unbalance instantaneous?
ADDITIONAL TIME Fixed time unbalance instantaneous?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking unbalance instantaneous?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid unbalance instantaneous setting?

APPLIED TO
SETTINGS (change) PROGRAM TABLE 1 PROTECTION WIND 1 PROT THERMAL IMAGE ENABLE Enable thermal image?
HEAT CONSTANT Heat constant thermal image?
COOL CONSTANT Cool constant thermal image?
ALARM TRES Alarm threshold thermal image?
BASE CURR Base current (In) ?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking thermal image?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid thermal image setting?
BREAK FAIL. PROT. ENABLE Enable breaker failure?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking breaker failure?
PHASE RES Phases restore breaker failure?
GND RES. Neutral restore breaker failure?
RETRIP T Fixed time breaker failure 2nd trip?
TRIP T Fixed time breaker failure?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid breaker failure setting?
WIND 2 PROT PHASE TOC ENABLE Enable phase timing?
RESIDUAL TOC. ENABLE Enable residual timing?
PHASE IOC ENABLE Enable phase instantaneous?
ADD TIME. Fixed time phase instantaneous?
ADD TIME. Fixed time level 1 residual instantaneous?
HIGH IOC PHASES IOC HIGH ENABLE Enable level 2 phase instantaneous?
ADD TIME. Fixed time level 2 phase instantaneous?
RESIDU IOC.HIGH ENABLE Enable level 2 residual instantaneous?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid level 2 residual instantaneous settings?

APPLIED TO
SETTINGS (change) PROGRAM TABLE 1 PROTECTION WIND 2 PROTECTION UNBALANCE TOC. ENABLE Enable unbalance timing?
ADD TIME. Fixed time unbalance instantaneous?
THERMAL IMAGE ENABLED Enable thermal image?
HEAT CONST Thermal image heating constant?
COOL CONST Thermal image cooling constant?
ALARM THRES. Thermal image alarm threshold?
LOCKING SIGNAL Thermal image locking?
NEW PAR VALID? Validate thermal image settings?
BREAKER FAIL. P.. ENABLED Enable breaker failure?
LOCKING SIGNAL Locking breaker failure?
REPOS. PHASE Reposition of breaker failure phases?
REPOS. GND Reposition of breaker failure ground?
RETRIP TIME Definite time 2nd trip breaker failure?
TRIP TIME Definite time breaker failure?
NEW PAR VALID? Validate breaker failure settings?
WIND 3 PROTECTION PHASES TOC ENABLE Enable phase timing?
RESIDUAL TOC ENABLE Enable residual timing?
PHASE IOC ENABLE Enable phase instantaneous?
ADD TIME. Fixed time phase instantaneous?
NEW PAR VALID? Enable instantaneous residual settings?

APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (change) PROGRAM TABLE 1 PROTECTION WIND 3 PROTECTION HIGH IOC PHASES IOC ENABLE Enable level 2 phase instantaneous?
ADD TIME. Fixed time level 2 phase instantaneous?
RESID. IOC HIGH ENABLE Enable level 2 residual instantaneous?
Fixed time level 2 residual
ADD TIME.
instantaneous?
Valid level 2 residual instantaneous
NEW PAR VALID?
settings?
UNBALANCE TOC ENABLE Enable unbalance timing?
ADDITIONAL TIME Fixed time unbalance instantaneous?
THERMAL IMAGE ENABLE Enable thermal image?
HEAT CONSTANT Heat constant thermal image?
COOL CONSTANT Cool constant thermal image?
ALARM TRES Alarm threshold thermal image?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking thermal image?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid thermal image setting?
BREAK FAIL. PROT. ENABLE Enable breaker failure?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking breaker failure?
PHASE RES Phases restore breaker failure?
GND RES. Neutral restore breaker failure?
RETRIP T
TRIP T Fixed time breaker failure?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid breaker failure setting?

APPLIED TO
SETTINGS (change) PROGRAM TABLE 1 PROTECTION GROUND PROT RESTRIC EARTH 1 ENABLE Enable restricted earth unit 1?
PICK UP Pick up restricted earth unit 1?
ADDITIONAL TIME Additional time restricted earth unit 1?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking restricted earth unit 1?
COMPAR. WINDING Comparation winding restricted earth unit 1?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid settings restricted earth unit 1?
RESTRIC EARTH 2 ENABLE Enable restricted earth unit 2?
PICK UP Pick up restricted earth unit 2?
ADDITIONAL TIME Additional time restricted earth unit 2?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking restricted earth unit 2?
COMPAR. WINDING Comparation winding restricted earth unit 2?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid settings restricted earth unit 2?
GROUND 1 TOC ENABLE Enable ground timing 1?
PICK UP Pick up ground timing 1?
CURVE SHAPE Curve shape ground 1?
TIME INDEX Time index ground 1 timing overcurrent?
FIXED TIME Time index ground 1 timing ?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking ground 1 timing?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid setting ground 1 timing?
GROUND 2 TOC ENABLE Enable ground 2 timing?
PICK UP Pick up ground 2 timing?
CURVE SHAPE Curve shape ground 2 timing?
TIME INDEX Time index ground 2 timing overcurrent?
FIXED TIME Time index ground 2 timing
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking ground 2 timing?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid setting ground 2 timing?
GROUND 1 IOC ENABLE Enable level1 ground 1 instantaneous?
PICK UP Pick up level1 ground 1 instantaneous?
ADDITIONAL TIME Fixed time level1 ground 1 instantaneous?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking level1 ground 1 instantaneous?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid setting ground 1 instantaneous?
GROUND 2 IOC ENABLE Enable level1 ground 2 instantaneous?
INST. GND .HIGH HIGH GND 1 ENABLE Enable level2 ground 1 instantaneous?
HIGH GND 2 ENABLE Enable level1 ground 2 instantaneous?

APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (change) PROGRAM TABLE 1 PROTECTION DIFFERENTIAL PROT PERCENT DIFFER ENABLE Enable differential?
SENSITIVITY Sensitivity (xIn)?
RESTR 1 (In) Restraint 1 current?
RESTR 2 (In) Restraint 2 current?
SLOPE α1 (%) Slope 1 (%)?
SLOPE. α2 (%) Slope 2(%)?
Additional time percent
ADD TIME.
differential l?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking percent differential?
Valid percent characteristic
NEW PAR VALID?
settings?
Enable instantaneous
INSTANT DIFFER ENABLE
differential?
Pick up instantaneous
PICK UP (In)
differential?
Instantaneous differential
ADD TIME.
additional timing?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking instantaneous?
Valid instantaneous
NEW PAR VALID?
differential settings?
INRUSH RESTRAINT ENABLE Enable INRUSH restraint?
RESTRAINT (%) Pick up INRUSH restraint?
Fundamental minimum
DIF.THRESHOLD
differential threshold
Valid INRUSH restraint
NEW PAR VALID
settings
OVEREXC. RESTRAINT ENABLE Enable overexcitation restraint?
RESTRAINT (%) Overexcitation restraint level?
Fundamental minimum
DIF.THRESHOLD
differential threshold
Valid overexcitation restraint
NEW PAR VALID??
settings
ADDITIONAL PROT HIGH/LOW FREQUEN STEP FREQUENCY. 1 ENABLE Enable step 1 frequency?
FREQUENCY. (HZ) Step 1 frequency?
ADD. TIME Step 1 frequency timing?
FREQ TYPE Step 1 frequency type ?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid step 1 frequency?
STEP FREQUENCY. 2 ENABLE Enable step2 frequency?
FREQUENCY.(HZ) Step 2 frequency?
STEP FREQUENCY 3 ENABLE Enable step3 frequency?
FREQUENCY.(HZ) Step3 frequency?
STEP FREQUENCY. 4 ENABLE Enable step 4 frequency?
FREQ TYPE Step 4 frequency type?
STEP FREQUENCY. 5 ENABLE Enable step 5 frequency?
FREQ TYPE Step 5 frequency type?
Prog. Frequency blocking.
GENERALS OF FREQ. BLOCKING SIGNAL
(generic)?
MIN. VOLT Supervision minimum voltage?
Number of frequency pickup
CYCLES NÒ
cycles?
Valid supervision minimum
NEW PAR VALID?
voltage?

APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (change) PROGRAM TABLE 1 PROTECTION ADDITIONAL PROT OVERVOLTAGE ENABLE Enable overvoltage?
PICK UP Overvoltage pickup threshold?
ADD TIME. Overvoltage fixed time?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking overvoltage?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid overvoltage setting?
INST.
ENABLE Enable overvoltage?
OVERVOLTAGE
PICK UP Overvoltage pickup threshold?
ADD TIME. Overvoltage fixed time?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking overvoltage?
NEW PAR VALID?
TIME
ENABLE Enable undervoltage
UNDERVOLTAGE
PICK UP Undervoltage pickup threshold
CURVE Undervoltage curve type
INDEX Time index. Undervoltage
ADD TIME. Undervoltage definte time
NEW PAR VALID?
INST.
ENABLE Enable undervoltage
UNDERVOLTAGE
PICK UP Undervoltage pickup threshold
ADD TIME. Undervoltage definte time
NEW PAR VALID?
SOBRETENSION
ENABLE Enable overvoltage
INST.
PICK UP Overvoltage pickup threshold
ADD TIME. Overvoltage fixed time
NEW PAR VALID?
5 HARM OVEREXC ENABLE Enable 5 harmonic overexcitation?
MIN CURR Operation minimum current (xIn)?
PICK UP(%) Pick up threshold (%)?
ADD TIME 5 harmonic overexcitation fixed time?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking 5 harmonic overexcitation?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid 5 harmonic overexcitation settings?
V/f OVEREXC.1 ENABLE Enable V/f overexcitation unit1?
MIN VOLT Operation minimum voltage?
PICK UP V/f overexcitation unit1pickup threshold?
CURVE TYPE Curve type time V/f unit 1?
TIME INDEX Time index time V/f unit 1?
ADD TIME 5 harmonic overexcitation fixed time?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking 5 harmonic overexcitation?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid 5 harmonic overexcitation settings?
V/f OVEREXC.2 ENABLE Enable V/f overexcitation unit2?
MIN VOLT Operation minimum voltage?
PICK UP V/f overexcitation unit1pickup threshold?
CURVE TYPE Curve type time V/f unit 1??
TIME INDEX Time index time V/f unit 1
ADD. TIME. V/f overexcitation unit 2 fixed time?
BLOCKING SIGNAL Blocking V/f overexcitation unit2?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid V/f overexcitation unit 2 settings?
WINDING SELECT WINDING SELECT Selecting winding?

APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (change) PROGRAM TABLE 1 OPERATION LOGIC W 1 BREAKER MON. TRIP LATCH Trip latch breaker 11?
OPEN FAIL.TIME Open failure timing (sec) breaker 1?
CLOSE LATCH Close latch breaker 1?
CLOSE FAIL. TIME Close failure timing (sec) breaker 1?
KI2 TRESHOLD KI2 alarm threshold breaker 1?
START KI2 KI2sum initial value breaker 1?
CALCULATION TYPE ki1 sum calculation type?
WAITING TIME Waiting time after trip?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid supervision setting breaker 1?
W 2 BREAKER MON. TRIP LATCH Trip latch breaker 21?
START KI2 KI2sum initial value breaker 2?
CALCULATION TYPE K21 sum calculation type?
VALID.PARAM.NUEVO? Valid supervision setting breaker 2?
NEW PAR VALID? Trip latch breaker 2?
W 3 BREAKER MON. TRIP LATCH Trip latch breaker 31?
CALCULATION TYPE Ki3 sum calculation type?
NEW PAR VALID? Trip latch breaker 31?
COIL SUPERV TRIP SV. EN. 1 Enable supervision coil 1 trip circuit?
CLOSE. SV. EN. 1. Enable supervision coil 1 close circuit?
TRIP SV. EN. 2 Enable supervision coil 2 trip circuit?
CLOSE. SV. EN. 2 Enable supervision coil 2 close circuits??
TRIP SV. EN. 3 Enable supervision coil 3 trip circuit?
CLOSE. SV. EN. 3. Enable supervision coil 3 close circuit?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid winding supervisions?
PROG.HISTORICS WIND AVERAGES Time window to calculate sample average?
RECORD I Historic record interval?
CALENDAR MASK Prog. Calendar mask for days of the week?
START TIME Daily register start time?
END TIME Daily register end time?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid changes in Historics?
PROGRAM TABLE 2 Program table 2. The same as program Table 1

APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (change) PROGRAM TABLE 0 CONFIGURE I/O CONFIG. INPUTS PROG. INPUTS INPUTS n Configure inputs?
NEW PAR VALID?? Valid changes in the input settings?
SELECT.NO/NC INPUTS n Select inputs NO/NC?
VALID IN NO/NC Valid input selection NO/NC?
ACTIVATION TIME ACT. IN. TIME Input activation time?
NEW PAR VALID?? Valid input activation time?
PROG. OUTPUTS PROG.OUTPUTS OUTPUT n Configure Outputs?
OUTPUT TYPE General trip?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid changes in the output settings?
ACT. OUT. TIME ACT. OUT. TIME Output activation time?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid output activation time?
PROGRAM LEDS PROG.LEDS LED n Configure LEDs?
MEMORIZED Memorize Yes/No?
NEW PAR VALID?? Valid changes in the LED settings?
GENERALS RELAY IN SERVICE IN SERVICE Enable relay in service?
BREAKER No. BREAKER NUMBER Breaker number?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid breaker number?
COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOL.COM 2 PROTOCOL.COM 2 See selec.communicat. type. Rear?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid. selec.communicat. type. Rear?
PORT COM 1 UCL ADDRESS Protection address?
BAUD RATE Baud rate(bauds)?
PARITY Parity?
STOP BITS Stop bit number?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid changes in communication settings?
PORT COM 2 (PROCOME) UCL ADDRESS Protection address?
(IF Procome) BAUD RATE Baud rate(bauds)?
PARITY Parity?
STOP BITS Stop bit number?
CONTROL SIGNALS None / RTS
NEW PAR VALID? Valid changes in communication settings?

APPLIED TO
SETTINGS (change) PROGRAM TABLE 0 COMMUNICATIONS PORT COM 2 (DNP) UCL ADDRESS UCL address for DNP communications?
(if DNP) MASTER ADDRESS Master address for DNP communications.?
BAUD RATE Baud rate in DNP communications?
PARITY Parity in DNP communications?
STOP BITS Stop bits for DNP communications. ?
RTS FIXED Channel type for DNP communications?
COMMUNIC.CONTROL RTS and CTS control for DNP communications?
CTS.WAIT T. CTS waiting time for DNP?
POR. WAIT T CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications?
STABILI. T Stabilization time for DNP communications?
ACK.WAIT T Waiting time to confirm link for DNP?
SYNCHRON T Synchronization time for DNP communications?
ACK. LINK Link confirm. for DNP communications?
APPLIC.M. BYTES N.. Application messages bytes number for DNP ?
CHANGES T. Change sending time for DNP communications ?
FROZEN T. Counter frozen time for DNP?
STATUS SENDING Status sending for DNP communications?
MESURES BITS N. Measurement format for DNP communications?
COUNTERS BITS N. Counter format for DNP communications?
NOT REQUESTED MSG Not requested message sending for DNP ?
PREV.COLLISION Collision prevision for DNP communications?
COL. FIXED T.. Collision fixed time for DNP communications?
COL. VBLE.. T. Collision variable time for DNP?
RESENDING T Non-requested message resending time for DNP?
NOT REQUEST MAX NUM. Maximum number of non requested messages for DNP?
ESPECIAL Especial for DNP communications?
MEASURES FORMAT Measurement format for DNP communications?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid changes in communications DNP?
PORT COM 2 (MODBUS) REMOTE ADDRESS UCL address?
(if Modbus) COMMUNIC. BAUD RATE Communication baud rate?
PARITY YES/NO Parity?
RTS. ACT. WAIT T. RTS activation waiting time
CARRIER WAIT T. Carrier waiting time
RTS. DEACT. WAIT T. RTS deactivation waiting time
MEASURE FORM MOD.BUS Measurement format for MOD-BUS communication
NEW PAR VALID? Valid MOD-BUS settings?

APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (change) PROGRAM TABLE 0 COMMUNICATIONS PORT COM2 (101) GENERALS LINK ADDRESS Remote station number at link level
(if 101) APPLIC. ADDRESS Remote station number at application level
BALANCED Communication in balanced mode or not
BAUD RATE Baud rate
CHANNEL TYPE Communication channel type
RTS AND CTS RTS and CTS control
STOP BITS Stop bits
CTS. WAIT T. (sec) CTS waiting time
POR. WAIT T (sec) Carrirer waiting time
RTS ACTIV TIME Waiting time after RTS
RTS DEACTIV TIME Waiting time to deactivate RTS
RESP. WAIT TIME Waiting time to confirm received message
TIME BETWEEN TRANS Time between two transmissions
TRANS. NUMBER Number of transmission attempts
NEW PAR VALID? Valid r parameters?
ASDU FIELDS APLIC. ADDRESS LENG Number of application address bytes
CAA LENGTH Number of link address bytes
COT LENGTH Number of bytes due to transmission
IOA LENGTH Number of bytes of information field
FORMATS TIME FORMAT Time format
TIME MEASUREMENTS Measurement sending with time
TIME COUNTER Counter sending with time
ADDRESSES SP ADDRESS Address of the first nformation object simple signal type
EV ADDRESS Address of the first nformation object event type
DP ADDRESS Address of the first nformation object double signal type
MEAS ADDRESS Address of the first nformation object measurement type
TAP ADDRESS Address of the first nformation object TAP type
COUN ADDRESS Address of the first nformation object counter type
BIT ADDRESS Address of the first nformation object bitstring type
OC ADDRESS Address of the first nformation object simple order type C
OC0 ADDRESS Address of the first nformation object simple order type CO
OC1 ADDRESS Address of the first nformation object double order type C1
OC2 ADDRESS Address of the first nformation object double order type C2
PAR ADDRESS Address of the first nformation object measurement parameter
FULL ADDRESS Address signalling the queue is full
HALF-FULL ADDRESS Address signalling the queue is half-full
GPS ADDRESS Address signalling GPS
SYNCHR. ADDRESS Address signalling GPS synchronization
NEW PAR VALID? Valid parameters?

APPLIED TO
SETTINGS PROGRAM
COMMUNICATIONS PORT COM2 (101) OTHER PARAMETERS % FULLING Fulling limit to activate the fulling alarm
(change) TABLE 0
Emptying limit to deactivate the fulling
(if 101) % EMPTYING
alarm
Start word for the event state
WORD EVENTS
refreshment
COMMAND MODE Command execution mode
COMMAND INFORMT Sending of command return information
FREEZE Periodical counter operation mode
Same address for measurement
MEAS. PAR. ADDRESS
parameters and measurements
META PROFILE. Meta reduced profile
GPS GPS installation
TRANSMIS. FACTOR Transmission factor time
ASDU SIZE Maximum number of bytes in the ASDU
BIT SQ Sending of compacted messages
COM2 PORT UCL ADDRESS UCL address
(If 103) BAUD RATE Baud rate
PARITY T. Parity
STOP BITS Number of stop bits
RTS ACT. T RTS activation waiting time
CARR. T. Carrier waiting time
RTS DEACT. T. Waiting time to deactivate RTS
SEND FORMAT Compatible VDEW/Extended
SEL COM TCP/IP SEL COM TCP/IP Select the protocol of the Ethernet Port
DEFINE DEVICE LANGUAGE LANGUAGE Language selected?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid language change?
SUPPLY FREQUENCY SUPPLY FREQUENCY Supply frequency?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid r Supply frequency change?
PHASES ORDER PHASES ORDER Phase order?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid Phase order?
CALIBR. SET POINTS PERMIS. KEYWORDO Enter KEYWORD Calibration keyword?
NEW PAR VALID? Valid Calibration keyword?
HIGH PART GAIN? High part gain?
LOW PART GAIN? Low part gain?
LOW PART GAIN 2? Low part gain2?
PUHBUTTONS ENAB. PUHBUTTONS Enable pushbuttons
LOCKING BY
Locking by command
COMMAND.
SUPPLY. SURVEIL ENABLE Enable supply surveillance
EXT. SUPPLY SURVEIL ENABLE Enable external supply surveillance

MIN. THRESHOLD
Alarm minimum threshold
ALAR.
MAX. THRESHOL
Alarm maximum threshold
ALAR.
TEMPERAT. SURVEIL ENABLE Temperature surveillance

MIN. THRESHOLD
Alarm minimum threshold
ALAR.
MAX. THRESHOL
Alarm maximum threshold
ALAR.
TEST MODE TEST MODE KEYWORD Enter KEYWORD Test mode keyword
NEW PAR VALID?
ENABLED TEST MODE Enable test mode

NEW PAR
Valid parameters?
VALID?
FORMAT IRIG-B FORMATO IRIG-B Select Irig-b format

INITIALIZE COUNT, MAXI,KI2.. W1 OPENINGS=0? Set faults wind.1 to 0?
W2 OPENINGS =0? Set faults wind.2 a 0?
W3 OPENINGS =0? Set faults wind.3 a 0?
W1 TRIPS=0? Set trips wind.1 to 0?
W2 TRIPS =0? Set trips wind.2 a 0?
W3 TRIPS =0? Set trips wind.3 a 0?
W1 MAXIMETER= 0? Set maximeter to 0?
W2 MAXIMETER =0? Maximeter 2 set to 0?

W3 MAXIMETER =0? Maximeter 3 set to 0?
KI2 W1=INIT. W1? Initialize KI2 1 sum with its value in the setting?
DELETE DATA? Reset the queues?

CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS 
APPENDIX IV. CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
IV.1. CURVES CEI 255-4./.BS142

Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to BS142, which correspond to the following types:
Normal Inverse characteristic

Long duration curve
Short duration curve
Very Inverse characteristic.
Extremely Inverse characteristic.
Very inverse special characteristic
These curves comply with the general formula
T = M * ( I / IoK)α −1
In which:
T: trip time (sec)

M: multiplier (“time index”). Valid range from 0.05 to 1.09 in steps of 0.01
I: Measured current
Io: Pickup current setting
K, α, constants which depend on the type of curve:
Constants Inverse charact. Short inverse Long inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse Very inv special
K 0.14 0.05 120 13.50 80.00 2.60
α 0.02 0.04 1 1.00 2.00 1.00
The following represent the curves, which correspond to indexes 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9 and 1.0 for
each type of characteristic. Bear in mind that there are another 9 curves between each of the two curves illustrated, except
between 0.05 and 0.1, between which there are another 4.

Normal inverse curve
T = M * ( I / IoK)α −1
K = 0,14 α = 0,02
Theoretical values given by the formula:
M \ I/Io 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 5.00 7.00 10.00 12.00 15.00 20.00 30.00 40.00
0.05 7.170 3.669 1.916 1.331 1.037 0.860 0.501 0.378 0.315 0.249 0.214 0.176 0.149 0.137 0.126 0.113 0.099 0.091
0.06 8.604 4.402 2.299 1.597 1.244 1.032 0.602 0.454 0.378 0.299 0.257 0.212 0.178 0.165 0.151 0.136 0.119 0.110
0.07 10.038 5.136 2.683 1.863 1.451 1.204 0.702 0.530 0.441 0.349 0.300 0.247 0.208 0.192 0.176 0.159 0.139 0.128
0.08 11.472 5.870 3.066 2.129 1.659 1.376 0.802 0.606 0.504 0.398 0.342 0.282 0.238 0.220 0.201 0.181 0.159 0.146
0.09 12.906 6.604 3.449 2.395 1.866 1.547 0.903 0.681 0.567 0.448 0.385 0.317 0.267 0.247 0.226 0.204 0.179 0.165
0.10 14.340 7.337 3.832 2.661 2.073 1.719 1.003 0.757 0.630 0.498 0.428 0.353 0.297 0.275 0.252 0.227 0.199 0.183
0.11 15.774 8.071 4.216 2.927 2.281 1.891 1.103 0.833 0.693 0.548 0.471 0.388 0.327 0.302 0.277 0.249 0.219 0.201
0.12 17.208 8.805 4.599 3.193 2.488 2.063 1.203 0.908 0.756 0.598 0.514 0.423 0.356 0.330 0.302 0.272 0.239 0.219
0.13 18.642 9.539 4.982 3.459 2.695 2.235 1.304 0.984 0.819 0.647 0.556 0.459 0.386 0.357 0.327 0.295 0.259 0.238
0.14 20.076 10.272 5.365 3.725 2.903 2.407 1.404 1.060 0.882 0.697 0.599 0.494 0.416 0.385 0.352 0.317 0.278 0.256
0.15 21.510 11.006 5.749 3.992 3.110 2.579 1.504 1.135 0.945 0.747 0.642 0.529 0.446 0.412 0.377 0.340 0.298 0.274
0.16 22.944 11.740 6.132 4.258 3.317 2.751 1.605 1.211 1.008 0.797 0.685 0.564 0.475 0.440 0.402 0.363 0.318 0.293
0.17 24.378 12.474 6.515 4.524 3.525 2.923 1.705 1.287 1.071 0.847 0.728 0.600 0.505 0.467 0.428 0.385 0.338 0.311
0.18 25.812 13.207 6.898 4.790 3.732 3.095 1.805 1.363 1.134 0.896 0.770 0.635 0.535 0.495 0.453 0.408 0.358 0.329
0.19 27.246 13.941 7.282 5.056 3.939 3.267 1.906 1.438 1.197 0.946 0.813 0.670 0.564 0.522 0.478 0.431 0.378 0.347
0.20 28.680 14.675 7.665 5.322 4.147 3.439 2.006 1.514 1.260 0.996 0.856 0.706 0.594 0.550 0.503 0.453 0.398 0.366
0.25 35.850 18.344 9.581 6.653 5.184 4.299 2.507 1.892 1.575 1.245 1.070 0.882 0.743 0.687 0.629 0.567 0.497 0.457
0.30 43.021 22.012 11.497 7.983 6.220 5.158 3.009 2.271 1.891 1.494 1.284 1.058 0.891 0.824 0.755 0.680 0.597 0.549
0.35 50.191 25.681 13.413 9.314 7.257 6.018 3.510 2.649 2.206 1.743 1.498 1.235 1.040 0.962 0.880 0.794 0.696 0.640
0.40 57.361 29.350 15.329 10.644 8.294 6.878 4.012 3.028 2.521 1.992 1.712 1.411 1.188 1.099 1.006 0.907 0.796 0.731
0.45 64.531 33.018 17.246 11.975 9.330 7.737 4.513 3.406 2.836 2.241 1.926 1.587 1.337 1.236 1.132 1.020 0.895 0.823
0.50 71.701 36.687 19.162 13.305 10.367 8.597 5.015 3.785 3.151 2.490 2.140 1.764 1.485 1.374 1.258 1.134 0.994 0.914
0.55 78.871 40.356 21.078 14.636 11.404 9.457 5.516 4.163 3.466 2.739 2.354 1.940 1.634 1.511 1.384 1.247 1.094 1.006
0.60 86.041 44.025 22.994 15.966 12.441 10.317 6.017 4.542 3.781 2.988 2.568 2.117 1.782 1.649 1.509 1.360 1.193 1.097
0.65 93.211 47.693 24.910 17.297 13.477 11.176 6.519 4.920 4.096 3.237 2.782 2.293 1.931 1.786 1.635 1.474 1.293 1.188
0.70 100.381 51.362 26.827 18.627 14.514 12.036 7.020 5.299 4.411 3.486 2.996 2.469 2.079 1.923 1.761 1.587 1.392 1.280
0.75 107.551 55.031 28.743 19.958 15.551 12.896 7.522 5.677 4.726 3.735 3.210 2.646 2.228 2.061 1.887 1.701 1.492 1.371
0.80 114.721 58.700 30.659 21.288 16.587 13.755 8.023 6.056 5.042 3.984 3.424 2.822 2.376 2.198 2.012 1.814 1.591 1.463
0.85 121.891 62.368 32.575 22.619 17.624 14.615 8.525 6.434 5.357 4.233 3.638 2.999 2.525 2.335 2.138 1.927 1.691 1.554
0.90 129.062 66.037 34.491 23.949 18.661 15.475 9.026 6.813 5.672 4.482 3.852 3.175 2.674 2.473 2.264 2.041 1.790 1.646
0.95 136.232 69.706 36.408 25.280 19.697 16.335 9.528 7.191 5.987 4.731 4.066 3.351 2.822 2.610 2.390 2.154 1.889 1.737
1.00 143.402 73.374 38.324 26.611 20.734 17.194 10.029 7.570 6.302 4.980 4.280 3.528 2.971 2.748 2.516 2.267 1.989 1.828
1.05 150.572 77.043 40.240 27.941 21.771 18.054 10.530 7.948 6.617 5.229 4.494 3.704 3.119 2.885 2.641 2.381 2.088 1.920

Inverse characteristic

Long duration curve (IEC)

k
T := M ⋅
α
 I  −1
I 
 0
K = 120, α = 1 tr = 120
M \ I/Io 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 120.000 60.000 30.000 20.000 12.000 6.000 4.000 3.000 1.500 0.667 0.316 0.154
0.06 144.000 72.000 36.000 24.000 14.400 7.200 4.800 3.600 1.800 0.800 0.379 0.185
0.07 168.000 84.000 42.000 28.000 16.800 8.400 5.600 4.200 2.100 0.933 0.442 0.215
0.08 192.000 96.000 48.000 32.000 19.200 9.600 6.400 4.800 2.400 1.067 0.505 0.246
0.09 216.000 108.000 54.000 36.000 21.600 10.800 7.200 5.400 2.700 1.200 0.568 0.277
0.10 240.000 120.000 60.000 40.000 24.000 12.000 8.000 6.000 3.000 1.333 0.632 0.308
0.11 264.000 132.000 66.000 44.000 26.400 13.200 8.800 6.600 3.300 1.467 0.695 0.338
0.12 288.000 144.000 72.000 48.000 28.800 14.400 9.600 7.200 3.600 1.600 0.758 0.369
0.13 312.000 156.000 78.000 52.000 31.200 15.600 10.400 7.800 3.900 1.733 0.821 0.400
0.14 336.000 168.000 84.000 56.000 33.600 16.800 11.200 8.400 4.200 1.867 0.884 0.431
0.15 360.000 180.000 90.000 60.000 36.000 18.000 12.000 9.000 4.500 2.000 0.947 0.462
0.16 384.000 192.000 96.000 64.000 38.400 19.200 12.800 9.600 4.800 2.133 1.011 0.492
0.17 408.000 204.000 102.000 68.000 40.800 20.400 13.600 10.200 5.100 2.267 1.074 0.523
0.18 432.000 216.000 108.000 72.000 43.200 21.600 14.400 10.800 5.400 2.400 1.137 0.554
0.19 456.000 228.000 114.000 76.000 45.600 22.800 15.200 11.400 5.700 2.533 1.200 0.585
0.20 480.001 240.000 120.000 80.000 48.000 24.000 16.000 12.000 6.000 2.667 1.263 0.615
0.25 600.001 300.000 150.000 100.000 60.000 30.000 20.000 15.000 7.500 3.333 1.579 0.769
0.30 720.001 360.000 180.000 120.000 72.000 36.000 24.000 18.000 9.000 4.000 1.895 0.923
0.35 840.001 420.000 210.000 140.000 84.000 42.000 28.000 21.000 10.500 4.667 2.211 1.077
0.40 960.001 480.000 240.000 160.000 96.000 48.000 32.000 24.000 12.000 5.333 2.526 1.231
0.45 1080.001 540.000 270.000 180.000 108.000 54.000 36.000 27.000 13.500 6.000 2.842 1.385
0.50 1200.001 600.000 300.000 200.000 120.000 60.000 40.000 30.000 15.000 6.667 3.158 1.538
0.55 1320.001 660.000 330.000 220.000 132.000 66.000 44.000 33.000 16.500 7.333 3.474 1.692
0.60 1440.002 720.000 360.000 240.000 144.000 72.000 48.000 36.000 18.000 8.000 3.789 1.846
0.65 1560.002 780.000 390.000 260.000 156.000 78.000 52.000 39.000 19.500 8.667 4.105 2.000
0.70 1680.002 840.000 420.000 280.000 168.000 84.000 56.000 42.000 21.000 9.333 4.421 2.154
0.75 1800.002 900.000 450.000 300.000 180.000 90.000 60.000 45.000 22.500 10.000 4.737 2.308
0.80 1920.002 960.000 480.000 320.000 192.000 96.000 64.000 48.000 24.000 10.667 5.053 2.462
0.85 2040.002 1020.000 510.000 340.000 204.000 102.000 68.000 51.000 25.500 11.333 5.368 2.615
0.90 2160.002 1080.000 540.000 360.000 216.000 108.000 72.000 54.000 27.000 12.000 5.684 2.769
0.95 2280.003 1140.000 570.000 380.000 228.000 114.000 76.000 57.000 28.500 12.667 6.000 2.923
1.00 2400.003 1200.000 600.000 400.000 240.000 120.000 80.000 60.000 30.000 13.333 6.316 3.077
1.05 2520.003 1260.000 630.000 420.000 252.000 126.000 84.000 63.000 31.500 14.000 6.632 3.231

Long duration curve

Short duration curve IEC

k
T := M ⋅
α
I
I  −1
 0
K = 0.05, α = 0.04 tr = 0.5
M \ I/Io 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 1.280 0.655 0.342 0.237 0.153 0.089 0.067 0.056 0.038 0.026 0.020 0.016
0.06 1.536 0.785 0.410 0.284 0.183 0.107 0.080 0.067 0.045 0.031 0.024 0.019
0.07 1.792 0.916 0.478 0.332 0.214 0.124 0.094 0.078 0.053 0.036 0.027 0.022
0.08 2.048 1.047 0.546 0.379 0.245 0.142 0.107 0.089 0.060 0.041 0.031 0.025
0.09 2.304 1.178 0.615 0.427 0.275 0.160 0.121 0.100 0.068 0.047 0.035 0.028
0.10 2.559 1.309 0.683 0.474 0.306 0.178 0.134 0.111 0.075 0.052 0.039 0.031
0.11 2.815 1.440 0.751 0.521 0.336 0.196 0.147 0.122 0.083 0.057 0.043 0.035
0.12 3.071 1.571 0.820 0.569 0.367 0.213 0.161 0.134 0.090 0.062 0.047 0.038
0.13 3.327 1.702 0.888 0.616 0.398 0.231 0.174 0.145 0.098 0.067 0.051 0.041
0.14 3.583 1.833 0.956 0.664 0.428 0.249 0.188 0.156 0.105 0.073 0.055 0.044
0.15 3.839 1.964 1.025 0.711 0.459 0.267 0.201 0.167 0.113 0.078 0.059 0.047
0.16 4.095 2.094 1.093 0.758 0.489 0.285 0.214 0.178 0.120 0.083 0.063 0.050
0.17 4.351 2.225 1.161 0.806 0.520 0.302 0.228 0.189 0.128 0.088 0.067 0.053
0.18 4.607 2.356 1.230 0.853 0.550 0.320 0.241 0.200 0.135 0.093 0.071 0.057
0.19 4.863 2.487 1.298 0.900 0.581 0.338 0.254 0.211 0.143 0.098 0.075 0.060
0.20 5.119 2.618 1.366 0.948 0.612 0.356 0.268 0.223 0.150 0.104 0.079 0.063
0.25 6.399 3.273 1.708 1.185 0.764 0.445 0.335 0.278 0.188 0.130 0.098 0.079
0.30 7.678 3.927 2.049 1.422 0.917 0.534 0.402 0.334 0.226 0.155 0.118 0.094
0.35 8.958 4.582 2.391 1.659 1.070 0.622 0.469 0.390 0.263 0.181 0.137 0.110
0.40 10.238 5.236 2.732 1.896 1.223 0.711 0.536 0.445 0.301 0.207 0.157 0.126
0.45 11.518 5.891 3.074 2.133 1.376 0.800 0.603 0.501 0.338 0.233 0.177 0.142
0.50 12.797 6.545 3.416 2.370 1.529 0.889 0.670 0.556 0.376 0.259 0.196 0.157
0.55 14.077 7.200 3.757 2.607 1.682 0.978 0.737 0.612 0.414 0.285 0.216 0.173
0.60 15.357 7.854 4.099 2.844 1.835 1.067 0.804 0.668 0.451 0.311 0.236 0.189
0.65 16.637 8.509 4.440 3.081 1.988 1.156 0.871 0.723 0.489 0.337 0.255 0.204
0.70 17.916 9.163 4.782 3.318 2.141 1.245 0.938 0.779 0.526 0.363 0.275 0.220
0.75 19.196 9.818 5.123 3.555 2.293 1.334 1.005 0.835 0.564 0.389 0.295 0.236
0.80 20.476 10.472 5.465 3.792 2.446 1.423 1.071 0.890 0.602 0.415 0.314 0.252
0.85 21.756 11.127 5.806 4.029 2.599 1.512 1.138 0.946 0.639 0.441 0.334 0.267
0.90 23.035 11.781 6.148 4.265 2.752 1.601 1.205 1.002 0.677 0.466 0.353 0.283
0.95 24.315 12.436 6.489 4.502 2.905 1.690 1.272 1.057 0.714 0.492 0.373 0.299
1.00 25.595 13.090 6.831 4.739 3.058 1.778 1.339 1.113 0.752 0.518 0.393 0.314
1.05 26.875 13.745 7.173 4.976 3.211 1.867 1.406 1.169 0.790 0.544 0.412 0.330

Short duration curve

Very inverse curve
T = M * ( I / IoK)α −1
K = 13,5 α=1
M \ I/Io 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 5.00 7.00 10.00 12.00 15.00 20.00 30.00 40.00
0.05 13.500 6.750 3.375 2.250 1.688 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.113 0.075 0.061 0.048 0.036 0.023 0.017
0.06 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.620 0.810 0.540 0.405 0.270 0.203 0.135 0.090 0.074 0.058 0.043 0.028 0.021
0.07 18.900 9.450 4.725 3.150 2.363 1.890 0.945 0.630 0.472 0.315 0.236 0.157 0.105 0.086 0.068 0.050 0.033 0.024
0.08 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 2.160 1.080 0.720 0.540 0.360 0.270 0.180 0.120 0.098 0.077 0.057 0.037 0.028
0.09 24.300 12.150 6.075 4.050 3.038 2.430 1.215 0.810 0.607 0.405 0.304 0.202 0.135 0.110 0.087 0.064 0.042 0.031
0.10 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.450 0.337 0.225 0.150 0.123 0.096 0.071 0.047 0.035
0.11 29.700 14.850 7.425 4.950 3.712 2.970 1.485 0.990 0.742 0.495 0.371 0.247 0.165 0.135 0.106 0.078 0.051 0.038
0.12 32.400 16.200 8.100 5.400 4.050 3.240 1.620 1.080 0.810 0.540 0.405 0.270 0.180 0.147 0.116 0.085 0.056 0.042
0.13 35.100 17.550 8.775 5.850 4.388 3.510 1.755 1.170 0.877 0.585 0.439 0.292 0.195 0.160 0.125 0.092 0.061 0.045
0.14 37.800 18.900 9.450 6.300 4.725 3.780 1.890 1.260 0.945 0.630 0.472 0.315 0.210 0.172 0.135 0.099 0.065 0.048
0.15 40.500 20.250 10.125 6.750 5.063 4.050 2.025 1.350 1.013 0.675 0.506 0.338 0.225 0.184 0.145 0.107 0.070 0.052
0.16 43.200 21.600 10.800 7.200 5.400 4.320 2.160 1.440 1.080 0.720 0.540 0.360 0.240 0.196 0.154 0.114 0.074 0.055
0.17 45.900 22.950 11.475 7.650 5.738 4.590 2.295 1.530 1.148 0.765 0.574 0.383 0.255 0.209 0.164 0.121 0.079 0.059
0.18 48.600 24.300 12.150 8.100 6.075 4.860 2.430 1.620 1.215 0.810 0.608 0.405 0.270 0.221 0.174 0.128 0.084 0.062
0.19 51.300 25.650 12.825 8.550 6.413 5.130 2.565 1.710 1.283 0.855 0.641 0.428 0.285 0.233 0.183 0.135 0.088 0.066
0.20 54.000 27.000 13.500 9.000 6.750 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.450 0.300 0.245 0.193 0.142 0.093 0.069
0.25 67.500 33.750 16.875 11.250 8.438 6.750 3.375 2.250 1.688 1.125 0.844 0.563 0.375 0.307 0.241 0.178 0.116 0.087
0.30 81.000 40.500 20.250 13.500 10.125 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.350 1.013 0.675 0.450 0.368 0.289 0.213 0.140 0.104
0.35 94.500 47.250 23.625 15.750 11.813 9.450 4.725 3.150 2.363 1.575 1.181 0.788 0.525 0.430 0.338 0.249 0.163 0.121
0.40 108.000 54.000 27.000 18.000 13.500 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 1.800 1.350 0.900 0.600 0.491 0.386 0.284 0.186 0.138
0.45 121.500 60.750 30.375 20.250 15.188 12.150 6.075 4.050 3.038 2.025 1.519 1.013 0.675 0.552 0.434 0.320 0.209 0.156
0.50 135.000 67.500 33.750 22.500 16.875 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.250 1.688 1.125 0.750 0.614 0.482 0.355 0.233 0.173
0.55 148.500 74.250 37.125 24.750 18.563 14.850 7.425 4.950 3.713 2.475 1.856 1.238 0.825 0.675 0.530 0.391 0.256 0.190
0.60 162.000 81.000 40.500 27.000 20.250 16.200 8.100 5.400 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.350 0.900 0.736 0.579 0.426 0.279 0.208
0.65 175.500 87.750 43.875 29.250 21.938 17.550 8.775 5.850 4.388 2.925 2.194 1.463 0.975 0.798 0.627 0.462 0.303 0.225
0.70 189.000 94.500 47.250 31.500 23.625 18.900 9.450 6.300 4.725 3.150 2.363 1.575 1.050 0.859 0.675 0.497 0.326 0.242
0.75 202.500 101.250 50.625 33.750 25.313 20.250 10.125 6.750 5.063 3.375 2.531 1.688 1.125 0.920 0.723 0.533 0.349 0.260
0.80 216.000 108.000 54.000 36.000 27.000 21.600 10.800 7.200 5.400 3.600 2.700 1.800 1.200 0.982 0.771 0.568 0.372 0.277
0.85 229.500 114.750 57.375 38.250 28.688 22.950 11.475 7.650 5.738 3.825 2.869 1.913 1.275 1.043 0.820 0.604 0.396 0.294
0.90 243.000 121.500 60.750 40.500 30.375 24.300 12.150 8.100 6.075 4.050 3.038 2.025 1.350 1.105 0.868 0.639 0.419 0.312
0.95 256.500 128.250 64.125 42.750 32.063 25.650 12.825 8.550 6.413 4.275 3.206 2.138 1.425 1.166 0.916 0.675 0.442 0.329
1.00 270.000 135.000 67.500 45.000 33.750 27.000 13.500 9.000 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.250 1.500 1.227 0.964 0.711 0.466 0.346
1.05 283.500 141.750 70.875 47.250 35.438 28.350 14.175 9.450 7.088 4.725 3.544 2.363 1.575 1.289 1.013 0.746 0.489 0.363

Very inverse characteristic

Extremely inverse curve
T = M * ( I / IoK)α −1
K = 80 α=2
M \ I/Io 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 5.00 7.00 10.00 12.00 15.00 20.00 30.00 40.00
0.05 39.024 19.048 9.091 5.797 4.167 3.200 1.333 0.762 0.500 0.267 0.167 0.083 0.040 0.028 0.018 0.010 0.004 0.003
0.06 46.829 22.857 10.909 6.957 5.000 3.840 1.600 0.914 0.600 0.320 0.200 0.100 0.048 0.034 0.021 0.012 0.005 0.003
0.07 54.634 26.667 12.727 8.116 5.833 4.480 1.867 1.067 0.700 0.373 0.233 0.117 0.057 0.039 0.025 0.014 0.006 0.004
0.08 62.439 30.476 14.545 9.275 6.667 5.120 2.133 1.219 0.800 0.427 0.267 0.133 0.065 0.045 0.029 0.016 0.007 0.004
0.09 70.244 34.286 16.364 10.435 7.500 5.760 2.400 1.371 0.900 0.480 0.300 0.150 0.073 0.050 0.032 0.018 0.008 0.005
0.10 78.049 38.095 18.182 11.594 8.333 6.400 2.667 1.524 1.000 0.533 0.333 0.167 0.081 0.056 0.036 0.020 0.009 0.005
0.11 85.854 41.905 20.000 12.754 9.167 7.040 2.933 1.676 1.100 0.587 0.367 0.183 0.089 0.062 0.039 0.022 0.010 0.006
0.12 93.659 45.714 21.818 13.913 10.000 7.680 3.200 1.829 1.200 0.640 0.400 0.200 0.097 0.067 0.043 0.024 0.011 0.006
0.13 101.464 49.524 23.636 15.072 10.833 8.320 3.467 1.981 1.300 0.693 0.433 0.217 0.105 0.073 0.046 0.026 0.012 0.007
0.14 109.268 53.333 25.455 16.232 11.667 8.960 3.733 2.133 1.400 0.747 0.467 0.233 0.113 0.078 0.050 0.028 0.012 0.007
0.15 117.073 57.143 27.273 17.391 12.500 9.600 4.000 2.286 1.500 0.800 0.500 0.250 0.121 0.084 0.054 0.030 0.013 0.008
0.16 124.878 60.952 29.091 18.551 13.333 10.240 4.267 2.438 1.600 0.853 0.533 0.267 0.129 0.090 0.057 0.032 0.014 0.008
0.17 132.683 64.762 30.909 19.710 14.167 10.880 4.533 2.590 1.700 0.907 0.567 0.283 0.137 0.095 0.061 0.034 0.015 0.009
0.18 140.488 68.571 32.727 20.870 15.000 11.520 4.800 2.743 1.800 0.960 0.600 0.300 0.145 0.101 0.064 0.036 0.016 0.009
0.19 148.293 72.381 34.545 22.029 15.833 12.160 5.067 2.895 1.900 1.013 0.633 0.317 0.154 0.106 0.068 0.038 0.017 0.010
0.20 156.098 76.190 36.364 23.188 16.667 12.800 5.333 3.048 2.000 1.067 0.667 0.333 0.162 0.112 0.071 0.040 0.018 0.010
0.25 195.122 95.238 45.455 28.986 20.833 16.000 6.667 3.810 2.500 1.333 0.833 0.417 0.202 0.140 0.089 0.050 0.022 0.013
0.30 234.147 114.286 54.545 34.783 25.000 19.200 8.000 4.571 3.000 1.600 1.000 0.500 0.242 0.168 0.107 0.060 0.027 0.015
0.35 273.171 133.333 63.636 40.580 29.167 22.400 9.333 5.333 3.500 1.867 1.167 0.583 0.283 0.196 0.125 0.070 0.031 0.018
0.40 312.195 152.381 72.727 46.377 33.333 25.600 10.667 6.095 4.000 2.133 1.333 0.667 0.323 0.224 0.143 0.080 0.036 0.020
0.45 351.220 171.429 81.818 52.174 37.500 28.800 12.000 6.857 4.500 2.400 1.500 0.750 0.364 0.252 0.161 0.090 0.040 0.023
0.50 390.244 190.476 90.909 57.971 41.667 32.000 13.333 7.619 5.000 2.667 1.667 0.833 0.404 0.280 0.179 0.100 0.044 0.025
0.55 429.269 209.524 100.000 63.768 45.833 35.200 14.667 8.381 5.500 2.933 1.833 0.917 0.444 0.308 0.196 0.110 0.049 0.028
0.60 468.293 228.571 109.091 69.565 50.000 38.400 16.000 9.143 6.000 3.200 2.000 1.000 0.485 0.336 0.214 0.120 0.053 0.030
0.65 507.318 247.619 118.182 75.362 54.167 41.600 17.333 9.905 6.500 3.467 2.167 1.083 0.525 0.364 0.232 0.130 0.058 0.033
0.70 546.342 266.667 127.273 81.159 58.333 44.800 18.667 10.667 7.000 3.733 2.333 1.167 0.566 0.392 0.250 0.140 0.062 0.035
0.75 585.367 285.714 136.364 86.957 62.500 48.000 20.000 11.429 7.500 4.000 2.500 1.250 0.606 0.420 0.268 0.150 0.067 0.038
0.80 624.391 304.762 145.455 92.754 66.667 51.200 21.333 12.190 8.000 4.267 2.667 1.333 0.646 0.448 0.286 0.160 0.071 0.040
0.85 663.415 323.810 154.545 98.551 70.833 54.400 22.667 12.952 8.500 4.533 2.833 1.417 0.687 0.476 0.304 0.170 0.076 0.043
0.90 702.440 342.857 163.636 104.348 75.000 57.600 24.000 13.714 9.000 4.800 3.000 1.500 0.727 0.503 0.321 0.180 0.080 0.045
0.95 741.464 361.905 172.727 110.145 79.167 60.800 25.333 14.476 9.500 5.067 3.167 1.583 0.768 0.531 0.339 0.190 0.085 0.048
1.00 780.489 380.952 181.818 115.942 83.333 64.000 26.667 15.238 10.000 5.333 3.333 1.667 0.808 0.559 0.357 0.201 0.089 0.050
1.05 819.513 400.000 190.909 121.739 87.500 67.200 28.000 16.000 10.500 5.600 3.500 1.750 0.848 0.587 0.375 0.211 0.093 0.053

Extremely inverse characteristic

Very inverse special curve

k
T := M ⋅
α
 I  −1
I 
 0
K = 2,6 α=1
M \ I/Io 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 5.00 7.00 10.00 12.00 15.00 20.00 30.00 40.00
0.05 2.600 1.300 0.650 0.433 0.325 0.260 0.130 0.087 0.065 0.043 0.032 0.022 0.014 0.012 0.009 0.007 0.004 0.003
0.06 3.120 1.560 0.780 0.520 0.390 0.312 0.156 0.104 0.078 0.052 0.039 0.026 0.017 0.014 0.011 0.008 0.005 0.004
0.07 3.640 1.820 0.910 0.607 0.455 0.364 0.182 0.121 0.091 0.061 0.045 0.030 0.020 0.017 0.013 0.010 0.006 0.005
0.08 4.160 2.080 1.040 0.693 0.520 0.416 0.208 0.139 0.104 0.069 0.052 0.035 0.023 0.019 0.015 0.011 0.007 0.005
0.09 4.680 2.340 1.170 0.780 0.585 0.468 0.234 0.156 0.117 0.078 0.058 0.039 0.026 0.021 0.017 0.012 0.008 0.006
0.10 5.200 2.600 1.300 0.867 0.650 0.520 0.260 0.173 0.130 0.087 0.065 0.043 0.029 0.024 0.019 0.014 0.009 0.007
0.11 5.720 2.860 1.430 0.953 0.715 0.572 0.286 0.191 0.143 0.095 0.071 0.048 0.032 0.026 0.020 0.015 0.010 0.007
0.12 6.240 3.120 1.560 1.040 0.780 0.624 0.312 0.208 0.156 0.104 0.078 0.052 0.035 0.028 0.022 0.016 0.011 0.008
0.13 6.760 3.380 1.690 1.127 0.845 0.676 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.113 0.084 0.056 0.038 0.031 0.024 0.018 0.012 0.009
0.14 7.280 3.640 1.820 1.213 0.910 0.728 0.364 0.243 0.182 0.121 0.091 0.061 0.040 0.033 0.026 0.019 0.013 0.009
0.15 7.800 3.900 1.950 1.300 0.975 0.780 0.390 0.260 0.195 0.130 0.098 0.065 0.043 0.035 0.028 0.021 0.013 0.010
0.16 8.320 4.160 2.080 1.387 1.040 0.832 0.416 0.277 0.208 0.139 0.104 0.069 0.046 0.038 0.030 0.022 0.014 0.011
0.17 8.840 4.420 2.210 1.473 1.105 0.884 0.442 0.295 0.221 0.147 0.111 0.074 0.049 0.040 0.032 0.023 0.015 0.011
0.18 9.360 4.680 2.340 1.560 1.170 0.936 0.468 0.312 0.234 0.156 0.117 0.078 0.052 0.043 0.033 0.025 0.016 0.012
0.19 9.880 4.940 2.470 1.647 1.235 0.988 0.494 0.329 0.247 0.165 0.124 0.082 0.055 0.045 0.035 0.026 0.017 0.013
0.20 10.400 5.200 2.600 1.733 1.300 1.040 0.520 0.347 0.260 0.173 0.130 0.087 0.058 0.047 0.037 0.027 0.018 0.013
0.25 13.000 6.500 3.250 2.167 1.625 1.300 0.650 0.433 0.325 0.217 0.163 0.108 0.072 0.059 0.046 0.034 0.022 0.017
0.30 15.600 7.800 3.900 2.600 1.950 1.560 0.780 0.520 0.390 0.260 0.195 0.130 0.087 0.071 0.056 0.041 0.027 0.020
0.35 18.200 9.100 4.550 3.033 2.275 1.820 0.910 0.607 0.455 0.303 0.228 0.152 0.101 0.083 0.065 0.048 0.031 0.023
0.40 20.800 10.400 5.200 3.467 2.600 2.080 1.040 0.693 0.520 0.347 0.260 0.173 0.116 0.095 0.074 0.055 0.036 0.027
0.45 23.400 11.700 5.850 3.900 2.925 2.340 1.170 0.780 0.585 0.390 0.293 0.195 0.130 0.106 0.084 0.062 0.040 0.030
0.50 26.000 13.000 6.500 4.333 3.250 2.600 1.300 0.867 0.650 0.433 0.325 0.217 0.144 0.118 0.093 0.068 0.045 0.033
0.55 28.600 14.300 7.150 4.767 3.575 2.860 1.430 0.953 0.715 0.477 0.358 0.238 0.159 0.130 0.102 0.075 0.049 0.037
0.60 31.200 15.600 7.800 5.200 3.900 3.120 1.560 1.040 0.780 0.520 0.390 0.260 0.173 0.142 0.111 0.082 0.054 0.040
0.65 33.800 16.900 8.450 5.633 4.225 3.380 1.690 1.127 0.845 0.563 0.423 0.282 0.188 0.154 0.121 0.089 0.058 0.043
0.70 36.400 18.200 9.100 6.067 4.550 3.640 1.820 1.213 0.910 0.607 0.455 0.303 0.202 0.165 0.130 0.096 0.063 0.047
0.75 39.000 19.500 9.750 6.500 4.875 3.900 1.950 1.300 0.975 0.650 0.488 0.325 0.217 0.177 0.139 0.103 0.067 0.050
0.80 41.600 20.800 10.400 6.933 5.200 4.160 2.080 1.387 1.040 0.693 0.520 0.347 0.231 0.189 0.149 0.109 0.072 0.053
0.85 44.200 22.100 11.050 7.367 5.525 4.420 2.210 1.473 1.105 0.737 0.553 0.368 0.246 0.201 0.158 0.116 0.076 0.057
0.90 46.800 23.400 11.700 7.800 5.850 4.680 2.340 1.560 1.170 0.780 0.585 0.390 0.260 0.213 0.167 0.123 0.081 0.060
0.95 49.400 24.700 12.350 8.233 6.175 4.940 2.470 1.647 1.235 0.823 0.618 0.412 0.274 0.225 0.176 0.130 0.085 0.063
1.00 52.000 26.000 13.000 8.667 6.500 5.200 2.600 1.733 1.300 0.867 0.650 0.433 0.289 0.236 0.186 0.137 0.090 0.067
1.05 54.600 27.300 13.650 9.100 6.825 5.460 2.730 1.820 1.365 0.910 0.683 0.455 0.303 0.248 0.195 0.144 0.094 0.070

Very inverse special characteristic

IV.2. ANSI CURVES

Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to ANSI, which correspond to the following types:
Normal Inverse characteristic

Very Inverse characteristic
Extremely Inverse characteristic
Moderately Inverse characteristic
These curves comply to the general formula
where:
T : Trip time (sec)

M : multiplier ("time index"). Valid range from 0.5 to 30.0 in 0.1 steps
I: Measured current
Io: Pickup current setting
A,B,C,D,E, constants that depend upon the type of curve:
Constants Inverse charact. Very inverse Extrem. inverse Moderat. inverse

A 0.0274 0.0615 0.0399 0.1735
B 2.2614 0.7989 0.2294 0.6791
C 0.3000 0.3400 0.5000 0.8000
D -4.1899 -0.2840 3.0094 -0.0800
E 9.1272 4.0505 0.7222 0.1271
The following represent the curves, which correspond to indexes 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0 and
30.0. for each type of characteristic. Bear in mind that there are another 9 curves between each two curves with a difference
of 1.0.

Normal inverse curve
A = 0.0274 B = 2.2614 C = 0.3000 D = -4.1899 E = 9.1272
M \ I/Io 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 5.00 7.00 10.00 12.00 15.00 20.00 30.00 40.00
0.5 8.614 7.067 4.944 3.613 2.739 2.142 0.883 0.523 0.377 0.256 0.203 0.151 0.113 0.098 0.082 0.066 0.050 0.041
1.0 17.229 14.134 9.888 7.226 5.478 4.284 1.766 1.047 0.754 0.513 0.407 0.302 0.226 0.196 0.165 0.133 0.099 0.082
2.0 34.457 28.268 19.775 14.452 10.956 8.568 3.531 2.094 1.508 1.025 0.814 0.604 0.452 0.392 0.329 0.265 0.198 0.164
3.0 51.686 42.402 29.663 21.678 16.434 12.853 5.297 3.140 2.262 1.538 1.220 0.906 0.678 0.587 0.494 0.398 0.297 0.246
4.0 68.915 56.536 39.550 28.904 21.912 17.137 7.062 4.187 3.016 2.051 1.627 1.208 0.904 0.783 0.659 0.530 0.397 0.327
5.0 86.144 70.670 49.438 36.131 27.389 21.421 8.828 5.234 3.770 2.564 2.034 1.510 1.130 0.979 0.824 0.663 0.496 0.409
6.0 103.372 84.804 59.325 43.357 32.867 25.705 10.594 6.281 4.524 3.076 2.441 1.812 1.356 1.175 0.988 0.796 0.595 0.491
7.0 120.601 98.938 69.213 50.583 38.345 29.989 12.359 7.328 5.277 3.589 2.848 2.114 1.582 1.370 1.153 0.928 0.694 0.573
8.0 137.830 113.072 79.100 57.809 43.823 34.274 14.125 8.374 6.031 4.102 3.254 2.415 1.808 1.566 1.318 1.061 0.793 0.655
9.0 155.059 127.206 88.988 65.035 49.301 38.558 15.890 9.421 6.785 4.615 3.661 2.717 2.034 1.762 1.482 1.193 0.892 0.737
10.0 172.287 141.340 98.875 72.261 54.779 42.842 17.656 10.468 7.539 5.127 4.068 3.019 2.260 1.958 1.647 1.326 0.991 0.818
11.0 189.516 155.474 108.763 79.487 60.257 47.126 19.422 11.515 8.293 5.640 4.475 3.321 2.486 2.154 1.812 1.458 1.091 0.900
12.0 206.745 169.608 118.650 86.713 65.735 51.410 21.187 12.562 9.047 6.153 4.881 3.623 2.712 2.349 1.977 1.591 1.190 0.982
13.0 223.974 183.742 128.538 93.939 71.213 55.694 22.953 13.608 9.801 6.665 5.288 3.925 2.938 2.545 2.141 1.724 1.289 1.064
14.0 241.202 197.876 138.425 101.165 76.690 59.979 24.719 14.655 10.555 7.178 5.695 4.227 3.164 2.741 2.306 1.856 1.388 1.146
15.0 258.431 212.010 148.313 108.392 82.168 64.263 26.484 15.702 11.309 7.691 6.102 4.529 3.390 2.937 2.471 1.989 1.487 1.228
16.0 275.660 226.144 158.200 115.618 87.646 68.547 28.250 16.749 12.063 8.204 6.509 4.831 3.616 3.132 2.636 2.121 1.586 1.310
17.0 292.889 240.278 168.088 122.844 93.124 72.831 30.015 17.796 12.817 8.716 6.915 5.133 3.842 3.328 2.800 2.254 1.685 1.391
18.0 310.117 254.412 177.975 130.070 98.602 77.115 31.781 18.842 13.571 9.229 7.322 5.435 4.068 3.524 2.965 2.387 1.785 1.473
19.0 327.346 268.546 187.863 137.296 104.080 81.400 33.547 19.889 14.324 9.742 7.729 5.737 4.294 3.720 3.130 2.519 1.884 1.555
20.0 344.575 282.680 197.750 144.522 109.558 85.684 35.312 20.936 15.078 10.254 8.136 6.039 4.520 3.915 3.294 2.652 1.983 1.637
21.0 361.803 296.814 207.638 151.748 115.036 89.968 37.078 21.983 15.832 10.767 8.543 6.341 4.746 4.111 3.459 2.784 2.082 1.719
22.0 379.032 310.948 217.525 158.974 120.514 94.252 38.843 23.030 16.586 11.280 8.949 6.643 4.972 4.307 3.624 2.917 2.181 1.801
23.0 396.261 325.082 227.413 166.200 125.992 98.536 40.609 24.076 17.340 11.793 9.356 6.944 5.198 4.503 3.789 3.050 2.280 1.883
24.0 413.490 339.216 237.300 173.426 131.469 102.821 42.375 25.123 18.094 12.305 9.763 7.246 5.424 4.699 3.953 3.182 2.379 1.964
25.0 430.718 353.350 247.188 180.653 136.947 107.105 44.140 26.170 18.848 12.818 10.170 7.548 5.650 4.894 4.118 3.315 2.478 2.046
26.0 447.947 367.484 257.075 187.879 142.425 111.389 45.906 27.217 19.602 13.331 10.576 7.850 5.876 5.090 4.283 3.447 2.578 2.128
27.0 465.176 381.618 266.963 195.105 147.903 115.673 47.671 28.264 20.356 13.844 10.983 8.152 6.102 5.286 4.447 3.580 2.677 2.210
28.0 482.405 395.752 276.850 202.331 153.381 119.957 49.437 29.310 21.110 14.356 11.390 8.454 6.328 5.482 4.612 3.713 2.776 2.292
29.0 499.633 409.886 286.738 209.557 158.859 124.242 51.203 30.357 21.864 14.869 11.797 8.756 6.554 5.677 4.777 3.845 2.875 2.374
30.0 516.862 424.020 296.625 216.783 164.337 128.526 52.968 31.404 22.618 15.382 12.204 9.058 6.780 5.873 4.942 3.978 2.974 2.455

Inverse characteristic

Very inverse curve
A = 0.0615 B = 0.7989 C = 0.3400 D = -0.2840 E = 4.0505
M \ I/Io 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 5.00 7.00 10.00 12.00 15.00 20.00 30.00 40.00
0.5 5.970 4.924 3.487 2.582 1.982 1.567 0.663 0.386 0.268 0.171 0.130 0.094 0.073 0.065 0.058 0.051 0.044 0.041
1.0 11.940 9.848 6.975 5.164 3.963 3.134 1.325 0.772 0.537 0.341 0.260 0.189 0.146 0.130 0.116 0.102 0.088 0.082
2.0 23.881 19.696 13.949 10.327 7.927 6.268 2.650 1.545 1.074 0.682 0.520 0.378 0.291 0.261 0.232 0.204 0.177 0.163
3.0 35.821 29.544 20.924 15.491 11.890 9.402 3.976 2.317 1.611 1.024 0.780 0.566 0.437 0.391 0.348 0.306 0.265 0.245
4.0 47.762 39.393 27.898 20.655 15.853 12.537 5.301 3.090 2.148 1.365 1.040 0.755 0.583 0.522 0.464 0.408 0.353 0.326
5.0 59.702 49.241 34.873 25.819 19.816 15.671 6.626 3.862 2.685 1.706 1.299 0.944 0.728 0.652 0.580 0.510 0.441 0.408
6.0 71.642 59.089 41.848 30.982 23.780 18.805 7.951 4.635 3.221 2.047 1.559 1.133 0.874 0.783 0.696 0.612 0.530 0.489
7.0 83.583 68.937 48.822 36.146 27.743 21.939 9.276 5.407 3.758 2.388 1.819 1.321 1.020 0.913 0.812 0.714 0.618 0.571
8.0 95.523 78.785 55.797 41.310 31.706 25.073 10.602 6.179 4.295 2.730 2.079 1.510 1.165 1.044 0.928 0.815 0.706 0.652
9.0 107.464 88.633 62.771 46.474 35.670 28.207 11.927 6.952 4.832 3.071 2.339 1.699 1.311 1.174 1.044 0.917 0.794 0.734
10.0 119.404 98.481 69.746 51.637 39.633 31.341 13.252 7.724 5.369 3.412 2.599 1.888 1.457 1.305 1.160 1.019 0.883 0.815
11.0 131.344 108.330 76.721 56.801 43.596 34.475 14.577 8.497 5.906 3.753 2.859 2.076 1.602 1.435 1.276 1.121 0.971 0.897
12.0 143.285 118.178 83.695 61.965 47.560 37.610 15.902 9.269 6.443 4.094 3.119 2.265 1.748 1.566 1.392 1.223 1.059 0.978
13.0 155.225 128.026 90.670 67.128 51.523 40.744 17.228 10.041 6.980 4.436 3.379 2.454 1.893 1.696 1.507 1.325 1.147 1.060
14.0 167.165 137.874 97.645 72.292 55.486 43.878 18.553 10.814 7.517 4.777 3.638 2.643 2.039 1.827 1.623 1.427 1.236 1.141
15.0 179.106 147.722 104.619 77.456 59.449 47.012 19.878 11.586 8.054 5.118 3.898 2.831 2.185 1.957 1.739 1.529 1.324 1.223
16.0 191.046 157.570 111.594 82.620 63.413 50.146 21.203 12.359 8.591 5.459 4.158 3.020 2.330 2.088 1.855 1.631 1.412 1.304
17.0 202.987 167.419 118.568 87.783 67.376 53.280 22.528 13.131 9.127 5.800 4.418 3.209 2.476 2.218 1.971 1.733 1.501 1.386
18.0 214.927 177.267 125.543 92.947 71.339 56.414 23.853 13.904 9.664 6.141 4.678 3.398 2.622 2.349 2.087 1.835 1.589 1.468
19.0 226.867 187.115 132.518 98.111 75.303 59.549 25.179 14.676 10.201 6.483 4.938 3.587 2.767 2.479 2.203 1.937 1.677 1.549
20.0 238.808 196.963 139.492 103.275 79.266 62.683 26.504 15.448 10.738 6.824 5.198 3.775 2.913 2.610 2.319 2.039 1.765 1.631
21.0 250.748 206.811 146.467 108.438 83.229 65.817 27.829 16.221 11.275 7.165 5.458 3.964 3.059 2.740 2.435 2.141 1.854 1.712
22.0 262.689 216.659 153.441 113.602 87.193 68.951 29.154 16.993 11.812 7.506 5.718 4.153 3.204 2.871 2.551 2.243 1.942 1.794
23.0 274.629 226.507 160.416 118.766 91.156 72.085 30.479 17.766 12.349 7.847 5.977 4.342 3.350 3.001 2.667 2.344 2.030 1.875
24.0 286.569 236.356 167.391 123.930 95.119 75.219 31.805 18.538 12.886 8.189 6.237 4.530 3.496 3.132 2.783 2.446 2.118 1.957
25.0 298.510 246.204 174.365 129.093 99.082 78.353 33.130 19.310 13.423 8.530 6.497 4.719 3.641 3.262 2.899 2.548 2.207 2.038
26.0 310.450 256.052 181.340 134.257 103.046 81.487 34.455 20.083 13.960 8.871 6.757 4.908 3.787 3.393 3.015 2.650 2.295 2.120
27.0 322.391 265.900 188.314 139.421 107.009 84.622 35.780 20.855 14.497 9.212 7.017 5.097 3.933 3.523 3.131 2.752 2.383 2.201
28.0 334.331 275.748 195.289 144.584 110.972 87.756 37.105 21.628 15.034 9.553 7.277 5.285 4.078 3.654 3.247 2.854 2.471 2.283
29.0 346.271 285.596 202.264 149.748 114.936 90.890 38.431 22.400 15.570 9.895 7.537 5.474 4.224 3.784 3.363 2.956 2.560 2.364
30.0 358.212 295.444 209.238 154.912 118.899 94.024 39.756 23.173 16.107 10.236 7.797 5.663 4.370 3.914 3.479 3.058 2.648 2.446

Very inverse characteristic

Extremely inverse curve
A = 0.0399 B = 2.2294 C = 0.5000 D = 3.0094 E = 0.7222
M \ I/Io 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 5.00 7.00 10.00 12.00 15.00 20.00 30.00 40.00
0.5 7.373 6.063 4.307 3.220 2.500 2.000 0.872 0.499 0.330 0.184 0.124 0.075 0.049 0.042 0.035 0.030 0.026 0.024
1.0 14.746 12.125 8.615 6.439 5.001 4.001 1.744 0.997 0.659 0.368 0.247 0.149 0.098 0.083 0.070 0.060 0.051 0.048
2.0 29.492 24.250 17.230 12.879 10.002 8.002 3.489 1.994 1.319 0.736 0.495 0.298 0.196 0.166 0.141 0.119 0.102 0.095
3.0 44.239 36.376 25.844 19.318 15.002 12.003 5.233 2.992 1.978 1.104 0.742 0.447 0.295 0.249 0.211 0.179 0.153 0.143
4.0 58.985 48.501 34.459 25.758 20.003 16.004 6.977 3.989 2.638 1.472 0.990 0.596 0.393 0.332 0.281 0.239 0.205 0.191
5.0 73.731 60.626 43.074 32.197 25.004 20.004 8.722 4.986 3.297 1.840 1.237 0.745 0.491 0.415 0.351 0.298 0.256 0.238
6.0 88.477 72.751 51.689 38.636 30.005 24.005 10.466 5.983 3.956 2.208 1.484 0.894 0.589 0.498 0.422 0.358 0.307 0.286
7.0 103.224 84.876 60.303 45.076 35.005 28.006 12.210 6.981 4.616 2.576 1.732 1.043 0.688 0.582 0.492 0.418 0.358 0.334
8.0 117.970 97.002 68.918 51.515 40.006 32.007 13.955 7.978 5.275 2.944 1.979 1.192 0.786 0.665 0.562 0.477 0.409 0.381
9.0 132.716 109.127 77.533 57.954 45.007 36.008 15.699 8.975 5.934 3.312 2.227 1.341 0.884 0.748 0.632 0.537 0.460 0.429
10.0 147.462 121.252 86.148 64.394 50.008 40.009 17.443 9.972 6.594 3.680 2.474 1.491 0.982 0.831 0.703 0.597 0.512 0.476
11.0 162.208 133.377 94.763 70.833 55.008 44.010 19.188 10.969 7.253 4.047 2.722 1.640 1.081 0.914 0.773 0.656 0.563 0.524
12.0 176.955 145.502 103.377 77.273 60.009 48.011 20.932 11.967 7.913 4.415 2.969 1.789 1.179 0.997 0.843 0.716 0.614 0.572
13.0 191.701 157.628 111.992 83.712 65.010 52.012 22.676 12.964 8.572 4.783 3.216 1.938 1.277 1.080 0.914 0.776 0.665 0.619
14.0 206.447 169.753 120.607 90.151 70.011 56.013 24.421 13.961 9.231 5.151 3.464 2.087 1.375 1.163 0.984 0.835 0.716 0.667
15.0 221.193 181.878 129.222 96.591 75.012 60.013 26.165 14.958 9.891 5.519 3.711 2.236 1.474 1.246 1.054 0.895 0.767 0.715
16.0 235.940 194.003 137.837 103.030 80.012 64.014 27.909 15.956 10.550 5.887 3.959 2.385 1.572 1.329 1.124 0.955 0.819 0.762
17.0 250.686 206.128 146.451 109.470 85.013 68.015 29.654 16.953 11.210 6.255 4.206 2.534 1.670 1.412 1.195 1.014 0.870 0.810
18.0 265.432 218.254 155.066 115.909 90.014 72.016 31.398 17.950 11.869 6.623 4.453 2.683 1.768 1.495 1.265 1.074 0.921 0.858
19.0 280.178 230.379 163.681 122.348 95.015 76.017 33.142 18.947 12.528 6.991 4.701 2.832 1.866 1.578 1.335 1.134 0.972 0.905
20.0 294.924 242.504 172.296 128.788 100.015 80.018 34.887 19.944 13.188 7.359 4.948 2.981 1.965 1.662 1.405 1.194 1.023 0.953
21.0 309.671 254.629 180.910 135.227 105.016 84.019 36.631 20.942 13.847 7.727 5.196 3.130 2.063 1.745 1.476 1.253 1.074 1.001
22.0 324.417 266.754 189.525 141.666 110.017 88.020 38.375 21.939 14.506 8.095 5.443 3.279 2.161 1.828 1.546 1.313 1.126 1.048
23.0 339.163 278.879 198.140 148.106 115.018 92.021 40.120 22.936 15.166 8.463 5.691 3.428 2.259 1.911 1.616 1.373 1.177 1.096
24.0 353.909 291.005 206.755 154.545 120.018 96.022 41.864 23.933 15.825 8.831 5.938 3.577 2.358 1.994 1.687 1.432 1.228 1.144
25.0 368.655 303.130 215.370 160.985 125.019 100.022 43.608 24.931 16.485 9.199 6.185 3.726 2.456 2.077 1.757 1.492 1.279 1.191
26.0 383.402 315.255 223.984 167.424 130.020 104.023 45.353 25.928 17.144 9.567 6.433 3.875 2.554 2.160 1.827 1.552 1.330 1.239
27.0 398.148 327.380 232.599 173.863 135.021 108.024 47.097 26.925 17.803 9.935 6.680 4.024 2.652 2.243 1.897 1.611 1.381 1.286
28.0 412.894 339.505 241.214 180.303 140.022 112.025 48.841 27.922 18.463 10.303 6.928 4.173 2.751 2.326 1.968 1.671 1.433 1.334
29.0 427.640 351.631 249.829 186.742 145.022 116.026 50.586 28.920 19.122 10.671 7.175 4.322 2.849 2.409 2.038 1.731 1.484 1.382
30.0 442.387 363.756 258.444 193.182 150.023 120.027 52.330 29.917 19.782 11.039 7.422 4.472 2.947 2.492 2.108 1.790 1.535 1.429

Extremely inverse characteristic

Moderately inverse curve
T := M ⋅  A + 
B D E
+ +
  I − C 2 3 
 I   I − C  I − C 
 0  I  I 
  0   0  
A = 0.1735 B = 0.6791 C = 0.8000 D = -0.0800 E = 0.1271
M \ I/Io 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 5.00 7.00 10.00 12.00 15.00 20.00 30.00 40.00
0.5 4.872 3.128 1.679 1.114 0.836 0.675 0.379 0.286 0.239 0.191 0.166 0.141 0.123 0.117 0.110 0.104 0.098 0.095
1.0 9.744 6.256 3.357 2.229 1.672 1.351 0.757 0.571 0.478 0.382 0.332 0.281 0.247 0.234 0.221 0.209 0.197 0.191
2.0 19.489 12.511 6.714 4.457 3.343 2.702 1.515 1.142 0.955 0.764 0.665 0.563 0.493 0.467 0.442 0.417 0.393 0.382
3.0 29.233 18.767 10.072 6.686 5.015 4.053 2.272 1.713 1.433 1.145 0.997 0.844 0.740 0.701 0.663 0.626 0.590 0.572
4.0 38.977 25.023 13.429 8.914 6.686 5.404 3.030 2.285 1.910 1.527 1.329 1.126 0.986 0.934 0.884 0.835 0.787 0.763
5.0 48.722 31.278 16.786 11.143 8.358 6.755 3.787 2.856 2.388 1.909 1.662 1.407 1.233 1.168 1.105 1.043 0.983 0.954
6.0 58.466 37.534 20.143 13.371 10.029 8.106 4.544 3.427 2.866 2.291 1.994 1.689 1.479 1.402 1.326 1.252 1.180 1.145
7.0 68.210 43.790 23.500 15.600 11.701 9.457 5.302 3.998 3.343 2.672 2.327 1.970 1.726 1.635 1.547 1.461 1.377 1.335
8.0 77.954 50.045 26.857 17.828 13.372 10.807 6.059 4.569 3.821 3.054 2.659 2.252 1.972 1.869 1.768 1.669 1.573 1.526
9.0 87.699 56.301 30.215 20.057 15.044 12.158 6.817 5.140 4.298 3.436 2.991 2.533 2.219 2.102 1.989 1.878 1.770 1.717
10.0 97.443 62.557 33.572 22.285 16.715 13.509 7.574 5.712 4.776 3.818 3.324 2.815 2.465 2.336 2.210 2.087 1.967 1.908
11.0 107.187 68.813 36.929 24.514 18.387 14.860 8.332 6.283 5.253 4.200 3.656 3.096 2.712 2.569 2.431 2.295 2.163 2.099
12.0 116.932 75.068 40.286 26.742 20.058 16.211 9.089 6.854 5.731 4.581 3.988 3.378 2.958 2.803 2.652 2.504 2.360 2.289
13.0 126.676 81.324 43.643 28.971 21.730 17.562 9.846 7.425 6.209 4.963 4.321 3.659 3.205 3.037 2.873 2.713 2.557 2.480
14.0 136.420 87.580 47.001 31.199 23.402 18.913 10.604 7.996 6.686 5.345 4.653 3.941 3.451 3.270 3.094 2.921 2.753 2.671
15.0 146.165 93.835 50.358 33.428 25.073 20.264 11.361 8.567 7.164 5.727 4.986 4.222 3.698 3.504 3.315 3.130 2.950 2.862
16.0 155.909 100.091 53.715 35.656 26.745 21.615 12.119 9.139 7.641 6.109 5.318 4.504 3.945 3.737 3.536 3.339 3.147 3.052
17.0 165.653 106.347 57.072 37.885 28.416 22.966 12.876 9.710 8.119 6.490 5.650 4.785 4.191 3.971 3.757 3.547 3.343 3.243
18.0 175.398 112.602 60.429 40.113 30.088 24.317 13.633 10.281 8.597 6.872 5.983 5.067 4.438 4.205 3.977 3.756 3.540 3.434
19.0 185.142 118.858 63.787 42.342 31.759 25.668 14.391 10.852 9.074 7.254 6.315 5.348 4.684 4.438 4.198 3.965 3.737 3.625
20.0 194.886 125.114 67.144 44.570 33.431 27.019 15.148 11.423 9.552 7.636 6.647 5.630 4.931 4.672 4.419 4.173 3.933 3.815
21.0 204.630 131.369 70.501 46.799 35.102 28.370 15.906 11.994 10.029 8.017 6.980 5.911 5.177 4.905 4.640 4.382 4.130 4.006
22.0 214.375 137.625 73.858 49.027 36.774 29.720 16.663 12.565 10.507 8.399 7.312 6.193 5.424 5.139 4.861 4.591 4.327 4.197
23.0 224.119 143.881 77.215 51.256 38.445 31.071 17.421 13.137 10.985 8.781 7.645 6.474 5.670 5.372 5.082 4.799 4.523 4.388
24.0 233.863 150.136 80.572 53.484 40.117 32.422 18.178 13.708 11.462 9.163 7.977 6.756 5.917 5.606 5.303 5.008 4.720 4.579
25.0 243.608 156.392 83.930 55.713 41.788 33.773 18.935 14.279 11.940 9.545 8.309 7.037 6.163 5.840 5.524 5.217 4.917 4.769
26.0 253.352 162.648 87.287 57.941 43.460 35.124 19.693 14.850 12.417 9.926 8.642 7.319 6.410 6.073 5.745 5.425 5.113 4.960
27.0 263.096 168.903 90.644 60.170 45.132 36.475 20.450 15.421 12.895 10.308 8.974 7.600 6.656 6.307 5.966 5.634 5.310 5.151
28.0 272.841 175.159 94.001 62.398 46.803 37.826 21.208 15.992 13.373 10.690 9.306 7.882 6.903 6.540 6.187 5.843 5.507 5.342
29.0 282.585 181.415 97.358 64.627 48.475 39.177 21.965 16.564 13.850 11.072 9.639 8.163 7.149 6.774 6.408 6.051 5.703 5.532
30.0 292.329 187.671 100.716 66.855 50.146 40.528 22.722 17.135 14.328 11.454 9.971 8.445 7.396 7.008 6.629 6.260 5.900 5.723

Moderately inverse characteristic

IV.3. USER CURVES

The user can program two curves, by introducing the points desired in the screen corresponding to the “User curve 1” or
“User curve 2” console.
The time corresponding to every I/Ia is programmed in seconds, with a minimum value of 0.020 seconds. These times
correspond to the index 1 curve, but as in curves IEC, the user can program an index of times between 0.05 and 1.09 in the
settings of protection currents.
All the model points do not have to be programmed. The console will assign the time of the first programmed point to those
having an I/Ia lower than itself, and the time of the last programmed time to those having an I/Ia higher than itself, that is, in
general the graphic will start and finish with horizontal lines. The intermediate points between two programmed points will be
calculated by the console as a lineal interpolarization between them.
The programming for a I/Ia value of a time higher than the one corresponding to a lower I/Ia, that is, rising lines are not
allowed.
Programming model:

Below there is an example:
I/Ia 1.2 4 8 12 15
T (s) 200 100 70 50 5

LIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS 
APPENDIX V. LIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS
V.1. DIGITAL SIGNALS

The following list includes all the available signals in the complete PD300 family. For each model of the family only the
signals corresponding to its available functions will be applied. Both the signals to be sent and their position can be
programmed. The number of signal indicated corresponds to the order with which they leave the factory.
Differential pick up Differential trip

No. signal Meaning No. signal Meaning
0. Phase A percent differential pick up 16. Phase A percent differential trip
1. Phase B percent differential pick up 17. Phase B percent differential trip
2. Phase C percent differential pick up 18. Phase C percent differential trip
3. Percent differential pick up 19. Percent differential trip
4. Phase A instantaneous differential pick up 20. Phase A instantaneous differential trip
5. Phase B instantaneous differential pick up 21. Phase B instantaneous differential trip
6. Phase C instantaneous differential pick up 22. Phase C instantaneous differential trip
7. Instantaneous differential pick up 23. Instantaneous differential trip
8. Differential pick-up 24. Differential trip
9. Phase A 2nd harmonic restraint 25. Function 86 status
10. Phase B 2nd harmonic restraint 26.
11. Phase C 2nd harmonic restraint 27.
12. Phase A 5th harmonic restraint 28.
13. Phase B 5th harmonic restraint 29.
14. Phase C 5th harmonic restraint 30.
15. 31.
Earthed Winding 1 overcurrent
32. Unit 1 restricted earth pick-up
48. Phase instantaneous pick-up (level 1)
33. Unit 2 restricted earth pick-up
49. Phase instantaneous pick-up (level 2)
34. Instantaneous earthed pick-up 1 (level 1)
50. Residual instantaneous pick-up (level 1)
51. Residual instantaneous pick-up (level 2)
36. Timed earthed pick-up 1
52. Unbalance instantaneous pick-up
53. Phases timed pick-up
54. Residual timed pick-up
39. Timed earthed trip 2
55. Unbalance time pick-up
40. Unit 1 restricted earth trip
56. Phase instantaneous trip (level 1)
41. Unit 2 restricted earth trip
57. Phase instantaneous trip (level 2)
42. Instantaneous earthed trip (level 1)
58. Residual instantaneous trip (level 1)
43. Instantaneous earthed trip 1 (level 2)
59. Residual instantaneous trip (level 2)
60. Unbalance instantaneous trip
61. Phases timed trip
62. Residual timed trip
63. Unbalance time trip

Winding 2 overcurrent Winding 3 overcurrent

64. Phase instantaneous pick-up (level 1) 80. Phase instantaneous pick-up (level 1)
65. Phase instantaneous pick-up (level 2) 81. Phase instantaneous pick-up (level 2)
66. Residual instantaneous pick-up (level 1) 82. Residual instantaneous pick-up (level 1)
67. Residual instantaneous pick-up (level 2) 83. Residual instantaneous pick-up (level 2)
68. Unbalance instantaneous pick-up 84. Unbalance instantaneous pick-up
69. Phases timed pick-up 85. Phases timed pick-up
70. Residual timed pick-up 86. Residual timed pick-up
71. Unbalance time pick-up 87. Unbalance time pick-up
72. Phase instantaneous trip (level 1) 88. Phase instantaneous trip (level 1)
73. Phase instantaneous trip (level 2) 89. Phase instantaneous trip (level 2)
74. Residual instantaneous trip (level 1) 90. Residual instantaneous trip (level 1)
75. Residual instantaneous trip (level 2) 91. Residual instantaneous trip (level 2)
76. Unbalance instantaneous trip 92. Unbalance instantaneous trip
77. Phases timed trip 93. Phases timed trip
78. Residual timed trip 94. Residual timed trip
79. Unbalance time trip 95. Unbalance time trip
Overcurrent additionals (1) Overcurrent additionals (2)
96. Winding 1 thermal image warning 112. Winding 1 breaker failure pick-up
99. 5th harmonic overexcitation pick-up 115. Winding 1 breaker failure trip
100. 116. Winding 2 breaker failure trip
101. 117. Winding 3 breaker failure trip
102. 118. Winding 1 breaker failure re-trip
103. 119. Winding 2 breaker failure re-trip
104. Winding 1 thermal image trip 120. Winding 3 breaker failure re-trip
105. Winding 2 thermal image trip 121.
106. Winding 3 thermal image trip 122.
107. 5th harmonic overexcitation trip 123.
108. 124.
109. 125.
110. 126.
111. 127.
Voltage additionals Inputs/outputs

128. Frequency pick-up level 1 144. Input 1

133. Overvoltage pick-up 149. Input 6
134. Overexcitation pick-upV/f unit 1 150. Input 7
135. Overexcitation pick-upV/f unit 2 151. Input 8
136. Frequency trip level 1 152. Output 1
141. Overvoltage trip 157. Output 6
142. Overexcitation trip V/f unit 1 158. Output 7
143. Overexcitation trip V/f unit 2 159.

Inputs/outputs Logics
160. Input 9 176. Logic 1
161. Input 10 177. Logic 2
162. Input 11 178. Logic 3
163. Input 12 179. Logic 4
164. Input 13 180. Logic 5
165. Input 14 181. Logic 6
166. Input 15 182. Logic 7
167. Input 16 183. Logic 8
168. Input 17 184. Logic 9
169. Output 8 185. Logic 10
170. Output 9 186. Logic 11
171. Output 10 187. Logic 12
172. Output 11 188. Logic 13
173. Output 12 189. Logic 14
174. Output 13 190. Logic 15
175. Output 14 191.
Generals / Breaker (1) Breaker (1)
192. Relay in service 208. Winding 3 breaker status

193. Hw status 209. Winding 3 ki2 exceeded
194. Local status 210. Winding 3 breaker open failure
195. 211. Winding 3 breaker close failure
196. Winding 1 breaker status 212. Winding 3 breaker open command
197. Winding 1 ki2 exceeded 213. Winding 3 breaker close command
198. Winding 1 breaker open failure 214. Unit 1 tripping circuit failure
199. Winding 1 breaker close failure 215. Unit 1 close circuit failure
200. Winding 1 breaker open command 216. Unit 2 tripping circuit failure
201. Winding 1 breaker close command 217. Unit 2 close circuit failure
202. Winding 2 breaker status 218. Unit 3 tripping circuit failure
203. Winding 2 ki2 exceeded 219. Unit 3 close circuit failure
204. Winding 2 breaker open failure 220. Unit 4 tripping circuit failure
205. Winding 2 breaker close failure 221. Unit 4 close circuit failure
206. Winding 2 breaker open command 222. Unit 5 tripping circuit failure
207. Winding 2 breaker close command 223. Unit 5 close circuit failure

Pickup / General trips Various

Not programmed Auxiliary supply higher than maximum threshold
Not programmed Auxiliary supply lower than minimum threshold
Not programmed Temperature higher than maximum threshold
Not programmed Temperature lower than minimum threshold
224. General pick-up
Not programmed Winding 1 maximeter at zero
225. Winding 1 pick-up
Not programmed Table 1 active
228. Frequency pick-up
Not programmed Table 2active
229. Earthed pick-up
230.
231. General trip
232. Winding 1 trip
233. Winding 2 trip
Not programmed Differential instantaneous locking
234. Winding 3 trip
Not programmed Winding 1 instantaneous locking
235. Frequency trip
236. Earthed trip
237.
Not programmed Neutral locking instantaneous
238.
Not programmed Earth restricted locking
239.
Not programmed Control RTS
Not programmed Low supply
Not programmed Events pending of being sent
Not programmed Irig-B sychronization failure
Various II
No. signal Meaning
Not programmed Signal 1 Relay 1 (GOOSE)

Not programmed Signa 2 Relay 1 (GOOSE)

V.2. MEASUREMENTS
The measurements transmitted as well as the order they are transmitted in can be programmed among all the available
signals. The programming is carried out through the Protection Console SIPCON/P.
In the following list the measurements treated (changes and states)are shown, indicating the order in which they leave the
factory. Each model will be applied only those measurements it disposes.
The background scale indicated corresponds to the count number 4095.
Factory
Factory measurement Background Background
Data measurement Data
No. scale scale
No.
0 Free Not programmed Note 1 Winding 1 last fault Ia
1 1,2*In Winding 1 Ia Not programmed Note 1 Winding 1 last fault Ib
2 1,2*In Winding 1 Ib Not programmed Note 1 Winding 1 last fault Ic
3 1,2*In Winding 1 Ic Not programmed Note 1 Winding 2 last fault Ia
4 1,2*In Winding 1 I average Not programmed Note 1 Winding 2 last fault Ib
5 1,2*In Winding 1 I maximum Not programmed Note 1 Winding 2 last fault Ic
6 1,2*In Winding 2 Ia Not programmed Note 1 Winding 3 last fault Ia
7 1,2*In Winding 2 Ib Not programmed Note 1 Winding 3 last fault Ib
8 1,2*In Winding 2 Ic Not programmed Note 1 Winding 3 last fault Ic
9 1,2*In Winding 2 I average Not programmed Note 1 Last fault voltage
10 1,2*In Winding 2 I maximum Not programmed Note 1 Phase A last fault differential I
11 1,2*In Winding 3 Ia Not programmed Note 1 Phase B last fault differential I
12 1,2*In Winding 3 Ib Not programmed Note 1 Phase C last fault differential I
13 1,2*In Winding 3 Ic Not programmed Note 1 Phase A last fault restraint
14 1,2*In Winding 3 I average Not programmed Note 1 Phase B last fault restraint
15 1,2*In Winding 3 I maximum Not programmed Note 1 Phase C last fault restraint
16 200 V Voltage Not programmed 70 Hz Last fault frequency
17 70 Hz Frequency
Not programmed 4095 Wind. 1 breaker opening No.
Not programmed 4095 Winding 1 ki2 sum
Note 1: the background scale of these measurements depend on the model as it is shown in the following table.
Model 2/3 winding Generator
In = 5 A 32*In = 160A 32A

In = 1 A 32*In = 32A
Mixed (In =1 A and 5A) 32*In = 32A
The indicated background scale corresponds to the secondary measurements; in case of measurements in the primary it will
be multiplied by the transformatio ratio.

V.3. COMMANDS
The commands that are sent as well as their order in can be programmed among all the available signals. The programming is
carried out through the Protection Console SIPCON/P.
In the following list the commands treated are shown, indicating the order in which they leave the factory. Each model will
be applied only those measurements it disposes.
Factory Factory
Command Command
measurement No measurement No
1 Activate relay 1 22 Open breaker
2 Activate relay 2 24 Close breaker
3 Activate relay 3 34 Unlock closing (function 86)
4 Activate relay 4 35 Open winding 1 breaker
7 Activate relay 7 38 Close winding 1 breaker
10 Activate relay 10 Not programmed Winding 1 locking
11 Activate relay 11 Not programmed Winding 1 unlocking
13 Activate relay 13 Not programmed Winding 2 unlocking
60 Activate table 1 Not programmed Winding 3 unlocking
61 Activate table 2 Not programmed Differential locking
62 Activate table 3 Not programmed Differential unlocking
63 Activate table 4 Not programmed Restricted earth locking
64 Activate table 5 Not programmed Restricted earth unlocking
65 Activate table 6 Not programmed Neutral locking
Not programmed Neutral unlocking
Not programmed Activ. Permanent output 1 Not programmed Deactivate output 1

In the following list the local console command treated are shown. They leave the factory as not programmed. They are only
active from the local console (see section “ Local/remote command”). Each model will only be applied those corresponding
to the measurements it disposes.
Factory order No. Command

Not programmed Active relay 1 local console
Not programmed Open breaker local console
Not programmed Close breaker local console
Not programmed Set in telecommand local console

LOGIC DIAGRAMS 
APPENDIX VI. LOGIC DIAGRAMS

The following pages show the logic diagrams corresponding to the protection functions.
The diagrams referring to functions are only applicable if the functions are enabled, otherwise they are not executed.

LOGIC DIAGRAMS 
Figure 1. Percent differential.
Figure 2. Harmonic restraint.

LOGIC DIAGRAMS 
Figure 3. Instantaneous differential.
Figure 4. Restricted earth.

LOGIC DIAGRAMS 
Figure 5. Closing unlocking (function 86).
Figure 6. Phase overcurrent.

LOGIC DIAGRAMS 
Figure 7. Residual and unbalance overcurrent.
Figure 8. Ground overcurrent.

LOGIC DIAGRAMS 
Figure 9. Overvoltage.
Figure 10. 5th harmonic overexcitation.

LOGIC DIAGRAMS 
Figure 11. V/f overexcitation.
Figure 12. Frequency.
Figure 13. Thermal overload

LOGIC DIAGRAMS 
Figure 14. Breaker failure Protection
Figure 15. Starts by winding.

LOGIC DIAGRAMS 
Figure 16. Trips by winding.
Figure 17. Several starts

LOGIC DIAGRAMS 
Figure 18. Several trips
Figure 19. Pick up/General trip

LOGIC DIAGRAMS 
Relation of the logic signals and the configuration with the figures.
Abbreviators used:
Phase “x” is referred to phases A, B, C

Unit “z” may be 1, 2. It is applied to restricted earth, earth connection
Level “y” may be 1 and 2
Winding “d” may be 1, 2, 3
Frequency step “f” may be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Differential signals
Digital Signal Name in Sipcon Name in figure Figure number
“x” Percent Differential Start “x” Percent Differential Start “x” Percent Differential Start Figure 1
Percent Differential Start Percent Differential Start Percent Differential Start Figure 17
“x” Inst. Differential Start “x” Inst. Differential Start “x” Inst. Differential Start Figure 3
Instantaneous Differential Start Inst. Differential Start Inst. Differential Start Figure 17
Differential Start Differential Start Differential Start Figure 17
“x” 2th harmonic “x” 2th harmonic “x” 2th harmonic Figure 2
“x” 5th harmonic “x” 5th harmonic “x” 5th harmonic Figure 2
“x” Percent Differential trip “x” Percent Differential trip “x” Percent Differential trip Figure 1
Percent Differential trip Percent Differential trip Percent Differential trip Figure 18
“x” Inst Differential trip “x” Inst Differential trip “x” Inst Differential trip Figure 3
Instantaneius Differential trip Inst Differential trip Inst Differential trip Figure 18
Differential trip Differential trip Differential trip Figure 18
Function 86 Status Function 86 State Closing Locking Figure 5
Earthed signal
Digital Signal Name in Sipcon Name in figure Figure number
Unit “z” restricted earth pick up “z” Restricted Ground Start Start 87G “z” Figure 4
Unit “z” restricted earth trip “z” Restricted Ground Trip Trip 87G “z” Figure 4
Instantaneous earthed pick up “z” (level
Ground IOC Start “z” Lev “y” Ground IOC Start “z” level“y” Figure 8
“y”)
Timed earthed pick up “z” Ground TOC Start. “z” Ground TOC Start “z” Figure 8
Instantaneous earthed trip “z” (level
Ground IOC Trip “z” Lev. “y” Ground IOC `Trip “z” level “y” Figure 8
“y”)
Timed earthed trip “z” Ground TOC Trip. “z” Ground TOC Trip “z” Figure 8
Signals per winding

Digital signal Name in Sipcon Name in figure Figure number
Phase Instantaneous pick up (level “y”) Phase IOC Start. “d” Lev. “y” Phase IOC Start. “d” Lev. “y” Figure 15
Residual Instantaneous pick up(level
Res. IOC Start. “d” Lev. y” Res. IOC Start. “d” Lev. y” Figure 7
“y”)
Unbalance Instantaneous pick up IOC Unbalance Start “d” IOC Unbalance Start Figure 7
Phase timed pick up Phase TOC Start. “d” Phase TOC Start. “d” Figure 15
Residual timed pick up Res. TOC Start. “d” Res. TOC Start. “d” Figure 7
Unbalance timed pick up TOC Unbalance Start. “d” TOC Unbalance Start. Figure 7
Phase Instantaneous trip(level “y”) Phase IOC Trip “d” Lev. “y” Phase IOC Trip “d” Lev. “y” Figure 16
Residual Instantaneous trip (level “y”) Res. IOC Trip “d” Lev. “y” Res. IOC Trip Lev. “y” Figure 7
Unbalance Instantaneous trip IOC Unbalance Trip “d” IOC Unbalance Trip Figure 7
Phase timed trip Phase TOC Trip “d” Phase TOC Trip “d” Figure 16
Residual timed trip Res. TOC Trip “d” Res. TOC Trip level “y” Figure 7
Unbalance timed trip TOC Unbalance “d” TOC Unbalance Figure 7
Winding “d” thermal image warning Thermal overload Start “d” Thermal overload Start Figure 13
Winding “d” thermal image trip Thermal overload trip“d” Thermal overload trip Figure 13
Winding “d” breaker failure pick up 52BF Dev. “d” Start BF Dev. “d” Start Figure 14
Winding “d” breaker failure trip 52BF Dev. “d” Trip BF Dev. “d” Trip Figure 14
Winding “d” breaker failure retrip 52BF Dev. “d” Retrip BF Dev. “d” Retrip Figure 14

LOGIC DIAGRAMS 
Overexcitation, voltage and frequency signals

5th harmonic overexcitation pick up 5 Harm. Overexc. Start 5 Harm. Overexc. Start Figure 17
5th harmonic overexcitation trip 5 Harm. Overexc. trip 5 Harm. Overexc. trip Figure 18
Frequency pick up level “f” Frequency Start “f” Frequency Start step “f” Figure 12
Frequency trip level “f” Frequency trip “f” Frequency Trip step “f”” Figure 12
Overvoltage pick up V/F start. V/F start. Figure 9
Overvoltage trip V/F Trip V/F Trip Figure 9
Overexcitation pick up V/f unit “y” V/F start. (“y”) 24V/f pick up unit “y” Figure 11
Overexcitation trip V/f unit “y” V/F Trip (“y”) 24V/f trip unit “y” Figure 11
General signals
Winding “d” pick up Pick up “d” Pick up winding “d” Figure 15
Winding “d” trip Trip “d” Trip winding “d” Figure 16
Frequency pick up Frequency pick up Frequency pick up Figure 17
Frequency trip Frequency trip Frequency trip Figure 18
Earthed pick up Neutral pick up Neutral pick up Figure 17
Earthed trip Neutral trip Neutral trip Figure 18
General pick up General pick up General pick up Figure 19
General trip General trip General trip Figure 19

DNP 3.0 RTU PROTOCOL 
APPENDIX VII. DNP 3.0 RTU PROTOCOL

This function allows communicating with a remote control station, using the communication protocol DNP3 at the level of control
messages.
The unit behaves as a remote position RTU.
The format by character is:
1 start bit.
8 data bits.
1 parity bit configurable between none, even and odd parity.
1 stop bit, configurable between 1 and 2 stop bit.
The baud speed can be chosen among 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400 bauds.
VII.1. SETTINGS
Word type parameter. It allows identifying the number of remote station. Range 0 - 65532.
UCL ADDRESS
Default value 1.
Word type parameter. It allows identifying the master station address. Range 0 - 65532.
MASTER ADDRESS
Default value 0.
This word type parameter allows to set the baud rate : 300 – 600 – 1200 – 2400 – 4800 – 9600 –
BAUD RATE 19200 - 38400) bauds.
Default value 9600
It allows configuring the parity to be used in the transmission. Even, odd or none parity.
PARITY
The advised default value is none parity, as indicated in DNP3 protocol.
It allows selecting the number of stop bits. 1 or 2 stop bits
BITS STOP
The advised default value is 1 stop bit, as indicated in DNP3 protocol.
When its value is YES the RTS signal is kept permanently active.
RTS FIXED
Default value NO.
It allows to select if the control if pins RTS and CTS is performed: NO RTS+CTS, RTS
COMMUNIC. CONTROL
Default value NO
It indicates the time, which is being waited for the CTS activation, after the RTS activation.
CTS. WAIT. T Range 0 - 100.
Default value 20.
It indicates the time, , which is being waited, once activated the CTS, to start the transmission with
the objective to stabilise the carrier.
Firmware Version Q and subsequent P and previous
CAR. WAIT TIME.
Units milliseconds hundredths of seconds
Value between 0 and 3000 0 and 100.
Default value 200 20.
It indicates the time, , which is being waited, once activated the CTS, to start the transmission with
the objective to stabilise the carrier.
Firmware Version Q and subsequent P and previous
STABILI. T
Units milliseconds hundredths of seconds
Value between 0 and 3000 0 and 100.
Default value 200 20.
Waiting timeout to confirm the csg link.
ACK. WAIT T Range 0 - 1000.
Default value 500.
Required time in minutes to ask the master for synchronization
SYNCHRONI. T Range 0 - 10.
Default value 0.
Indicates if confirm is required al link level.
YES = confirm is required.
ACK LINK
NO = confirm. is not required
Default value NO.
Maximum number of bytes in an application segment. Range 1024 - 3072.
APPLIC. M. BYTES. N.
Default value 1024.
Transfer time of the default changes. It can take the following values:
CHANGE T
BOTH = sent with absolute and relative values.

WITHOU TIME = sent without time.

ABSOLUTE = sent with absolute time.
RELATIVE = sent with relative time.
Default value ABSOLUTE.
It indicates if the counters are frozen with or without time. It performs only in the case that a 0
variation is requested.
FROZEN T WITH TIME = sent with time.
WITHOUT TIME = sent without time.
Default value WITH TIME.
It indicates if in the answer message to a class 0 data request, the objects of digital signals,
measurements and counters with or without status are sent.
Value 0->it does not send status for any signal.
bit 0-> everything is sent with status. to one
bit 1->it sends digital signals with status.
STATUS SENDING
bit 2->it sends measurements with status.
bit 3->it sends counters with status.
bit 4->it sends frozen counters with status.
There are two ways to send everything with status: to write a 1 or a 14
Default value 0.
It indicates the format in which the counters are sent when the Var field is not specified in the
request, and as non requested changes.
MEAS16_32 16 BITS = they are sent in 16 bits.
32 BITS = they are sent in 32 bits.
Default value 32 BITS.
It indicates the format in which the counters are sent when the Var field is not specified in the
request, and as non requested changes.
CON 16_32 16 BITS = they are sent in 16 bits.
32 BITS = they are sent in 32 bits.
Default value 32 BITS.
At value YES it allows the transfer of non requested messages with class data 1, 2 or 3.
NOT REQUESTED MSG
Default value NO.
At value YES a treatment is performed to prevent collisions. At value NO the DCD is not checked.
PREV. COLLISION
Default value NO.
Waiting time set in hundredths of second which the unit waits since it is allowed to transfer
through the DCD. Range 0 - 1000.
COL.FIXED T
Range 0 - 1000.
Default value 10..
Variable waiting time. Depending on the selected value it can be obtained the maximum value
which can be reached by the hundredths of seconds. This value will be a random value between 0
and such maximum.
COL. VBLE. T
Possible values: 1-3-5-7-15-31-63-127-255
Note: it must be highlighted that the time delay is reset once the DCD is lost.
Default value 7.
It is the time in seconds in which the unit waits to try again the transfer of non requested data,
when it does not receive the link confirmation and the application to an old transfer and its
RESENDING T. reattempt after the answer waiting time.
Range 0 – 630 seconds
Default value 20.
Maximum number of repetitions of a non requested message. At infinite zero value.
NOT REQ. MAX. NUM Range 0 - 65535.
Default value 0.
It allows to activate some particular aspects of the operation.
BIT 0->0x0001 Transfer of actual counters with OBJ=21.
BIT 1->0x0002 Reserve.
BIT 2->0x0004 Transfer of non requested message up to the included IIN every 10 seconds
ESPECIAL
BIT 6->0x0040 It does not transfer the restart message when starting.
BIT 7->0x0080 Trip close.
Default value 0.
It indicates the measurements transfer format.1
COUNTS
MEASUREMENT FORMAT
SECONDARY (CALCULATED)
PRIMARY
1
From version R onwards, it has been added the option “Primary”, which gives the measurements in the primary. The option “Calculated” or “Secondary” gives the
measurements in the secondary.

VII.2. OPERATION INDICATIONS
VII.2.1 Spontaneous message indicating RESTART

At RTU starting, in the case that the transfer of spontaneous non requested messages is enabled, it will be sent a
spontaneous and empty message which activates the bit corresponding to the IIN RESTART requiring application
confirmation.
It will stop transferring when receiving the application confirmation with the correct application sequence number. For
the repetition times associated to this message, they will be applied as for the rest of the spontaneous messages,
except in the number of reattempts before cancelling the message, this means that the setting NOT REQUESTED
MAX is not considered in this message.
VII.2.2 Synchronization
The bit corresponding to Need Time in the IIN is activated periodically according to the value of the setting
SYNCHRONI. T.
VII.2.3 Treatment and detection of digital changes

It is maintained a circular queue of 1024 changes, which stores the changes in the signals in order to transfer them to
the control centre. Changes of digital signals by communications can be filtered by configuring 0 class, this can be
done for individual signals or for all.
No changes are detected at the starting of the unit and until it does not start communicating.
The setting ERASE DATA ? does not act over the DNP3 protocol
VII.2.4 Transfer of spontaneous messages

For the transfer of spontaneous messages, if there are any messages stored in the different classes of changes, the
priority of classes will be followed, this means that the queue class 1 is emptied first, then the class 2 and last the
class 3.
If the parameter NOT REQUESTED MESSAGES at value 1 is not found, no spontaneous message is sent.
A treatment of collisions will be performed depending on the parameter PREV. COLLISION. The signal DCD is used
along with the parameters COL.FIXED T and COL.VBLE. T.
In the case that no answer is obtained to the messages of non-requested changes, a reattempt will be performed once
expired the time defined by the parameter ACK. WAIT. T. Then periodical transfers will be performed according to the
parameter RESENDING T Each time a message is repeated, all the new changes will be included in it, so that the
message is created again at each repetition.
VII.2.5 Particular aspects of the operation

Only one reading or writing order can be selected or executed each time.
The selection of orders and writings will be kept during 15sc.
There is a change queue for digital signals.
If frozen counters are requested and these have not been frozen previously, they are answered at value 0 and with time
set to 0.

In the event of receiving a request for any system static object and this does not exist, it will be answered up to the IIN
and indicating an unknown object.
VII.3. DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
Vendor Name: INGETEAM TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION S.A.
Device Name: SIPC
Highest DNP Level Supported:
Device Function:
For Requests Level 3
 Master  Slave
For Responses Level 3
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is
described in the attached table):
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted 292 Transmitted 1024< >3072( configurable)
Received 292 Received 1024
Maximum Data Link Re-tries:
Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
 None
 None
 Fixed at 1
 Configurable, range ____ to ____
 Configurable, range __ to __
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
 Never
 Always
 Sometimes
 Configurable PARAMETER DATA_ACK = 1
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
 When reporting Event Data
 When sending multi-fragment responses
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm  None  Fixed at _________  Variable  Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment  None  Fixed at _________  Variable  Configurable
Application Confirm  None  Fixed at __10 sg____  Variable  Configurable
Complete Appl. Response  None  Fixed at _________  Variable  Configurable
Others
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
WRITE Binary Outputs  Never Always  Sometimes  Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Count > 1  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable

Pulse On  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Pulse Off  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Latch On  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Latch Off  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Queue  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Clear Queue  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no specific
requested: variation requested:
 Never  Never
 Only time-tagged  Binary Input Change With Time
 Only non-time-tagged  Binary Input Change With Relative Time
 Configurable to send both, one or the other (attach explanation)  Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses:
 Never Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
 Configurable (attach explanation)  Never
 Only certain objects  When Device Restarts
 Sometimes (attach explanation)  When Status Flags Change
ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED
Function codes supported
Supports Collision Avoidance: Collision Avoidance Detection Method:
Configurable DCD

DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
Counters Roll Over at:
Default Counter Object/Variation:
 No Counters Reported
 No Counters Reported
 Configurable (attach explanation)
 Configurable (attach explanation)
 16 Bits
 Default Object _________
 32 Bits
Default Variation ______
 Other Value _____________
 Point-by-point list attached
 Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:  Yes  No
VII.4. IMPLEMENTATION TABLE

REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(slave must parse) (master must parse)
Obj Var Description Func Codes (dec) Qual Codes (hex) Func Codes Qual Codes (hex)
1 0 Binary Input – All Variations 1,22 00,01,06, 07,08
1 1 Binary Input 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00,01
1 2 Binary Input with Status 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00,01
1 06,07,08
2 0 Binary Input Change - All Variations
20*,21* 06
2 1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
2 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
2 3 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
10 0 Binary Output - All Variations 1 00,01,06
10 1 Binary Output
10 2 Binary Output Status 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
12 0 Control Block - All Variations
12
1 Control Relay Output Block 3, 4, 5, 6 17, 28 129 Echo of request
12 2 Pattern Control Block

12 3 Pattern Mask
20 0 Binary Counter - All Variations 1, 7, 8, 9, 10,22 00,01,06, 07,08
20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1, 7, 8, 9, 10 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00,01
20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 1, 7, 8, 9, 10 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00,01
20 3 32-Bit Delta Counter 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00,01
20 4 16-Bit Delta Counter 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00,01
20 5 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00, 01
20 6 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00, 01
20 7 32-Bit Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00,01
20 8 16-Bit Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00,01
21 0 Frozen Counters - All Variations 1, 22 00,01,06
21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of Freeze 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
21 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of Freeze 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
21 7 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time of Freeze 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 8 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time of Freeze 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 11 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 12 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
22 0 Counter Change Event – All Variations 1 06,07,08
22 1 32-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
22 2 16-Bit Counter Change Event without time 1 06,07,08 129, 130
28
22 3 32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28

REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
22 4 16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
22 5 32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time
22 6 16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time
22 7 32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event with Time
22 8 16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event with Time
23 0 Frozen Counter Events – All Variations 1 06, 07, 08 129
23 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
23 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
23 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
23 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
23 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time
23 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time
23 7 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event with Time
23 8 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event with Time
30 0 Analog Input - All Variations 1, 22 00,01,06, 07,08
30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00, 01
30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00,01
30 3 32-Bit Analog Input without flag 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00, 01
30 4 16-Bit Analog Input without flag 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00, 01
31 0 Frozen Analog Input - All Variations
31 1 32-Bit Frozen Analog Input
31 2 16-Bit Frozen Analog Input
31 3 32-Bit Frozen Analog Input with Time of Freeze
31 4 16-Bit Frozen Analog Input with Time of Freeze
31 5 32-Bit Frozen Analog Input without Flag
31 6 16-Bit Frozen Analog Input without Flag
1 06,07,08
32 0 Analog Change Event - All Variations
20*,21* 06
32 1 32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
32 2 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
32 3 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time
32 4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time
33 0 Frozen Analog Event - All Variations
33 1 32-Bit Frozen Analog Event without Time
33 2 16-Bit Frozen Analog Event without Time
33 3 32-Bit Frozen Analog Event with Time
33 4 16-Bit Frozen Analog Event with Time
40 0 Analog Output Status - All Variations 1 00, 01, 06
40 1 32-Bit Analog Output Status 1 00, 01, 06 129 00,01
40 2 16-Bit Analog Output Status 1 00, 01, 06 129 00,01
41 1 32-Bit Analog Output Block
41 2 16-Bit Analog Output Block 3, 4, 5, 6 17, 28 129 Echo of request
50 0 Time and Date - All Variations
2 07, quantity = 1
50 1 Time and Date
1 07 quantity = 1 129 07 quantity = 1
50 2 Time and Date with Interval
51 0 Time and Date CTO - All Variations
51 1 Time and Date CTO 129 07, quantity=1
51 2 Unsynchronized Time and Date CTO 129 07, quantity=1
52 0 Time Delay - All Variations
52 1 Time Delay Coarse
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 07, quantity=1
60 0 Not Defined
60 1 Class 0 Data 1 06
1 06,07,08
60 2 Class 1 Data
20, 21,22 06
1 06,07,08
60 3 Class 2 Data
20, 21, 22 06
1 06,07,08
60 4 Class 3 Data
20, 21, 22 06

REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
70 1 File Identifier
1 00, 01 129 00
80 1 Internal Indications 00
2
index=7
81 1 Storage Object
82 1 Device Profile
83 1 Private Registration Object
83 2 Private Registration Object Descriptor
90 1 Application Identifier
100 1 Short Floating Point
100 2 Long Floating Point
100 3 Extended Floating Point
101 1 Small Packed Binary-Coded Decimal
101 2 Medium Packed Binary-Coded Decimal
101 3 Large Packed Binary-Coded Decimal
No Object 13, 14
No Object 23
Compatibility with. IBM
VII.5. SIGNAL LISTS
VII.5.1 Digital signals

The signals transmitted and the order they are transmitted in can be programmed among the available ones. The
programming is carried out through the Protection Console SIPCON/P.
In the appendix “List of available signals” the digital signals treated (changes and status) are shown, indicating the
order with which they leave the factory (signal no.). Each model will be only applied those measurements
corresponding to the functions it disposes.
VII.5.2 Analogue measurements

The measurements transmitted and the order they are transmitted in can be programmed among the available ones.
The programming is carried out through the Protection Console SIPCON/P
In the appendix “List of available signals” the measurements treated, are shown, indicating the order with which they
leave the factory (signal no.). Each model will be only applied those corresponding to the measurements it disposes.
The measurement format with which it leaves the factory is counts.
The background scale indicated corresponds to the 4095 count number.
VII.5.3 Commands
The commands transmitted and the order they are transmitted in can be programmed among the available ones. The
programming is carried out through the Protection Console SIPCON/P
In the appendix “List of available signals” the commands treated, are shown, indicating the order with which they
leave the factory (signal no.). Each model will be only applied those corresponding to the functions it disposes.

MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL 
APPENDIX VIII. MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

The communications module MODBUS RTU implemented in the protection unit allows the communication as slave station with a
master position via the rear communication port (RS232, RS485 or Optical fibre).
VIII.1. PROTOCOL CHARACTERISTICS
VIII.1.1 Messages format

Master question:
Remote address - 1 byte
Function code - 1 byte
Data - variable number of bytes
CRC - 2 byte
Slave answer:
Remote address - 1 byte
Function code - 1 byte
Data - variable number of bytes
CRC - 2 byte
Remote address: PD300 address in respect to the Modbus protocol (range 1 to 255). Only broadcast messages are
accepted (address 0) for synchronization with the function 16.
Function code: If >127 (Byte MSB at 1) means that the remote address has not fulfilled the required function and
it is going to respond with an error code.
Data : Each data word is sent MSByte first, followed by LSByte.
CRC : LSByte is sent first, followed by MSByte.
CRC generator polynomy:
x16 + x15 + x2 +1
VIII.1.2 MODBUS Functions

The following functions are used within the defined by the MODBUS protocol:
03 – Read Setpoints and Actual Values
04 – Read Setpoints and Actual Values
(functions 03 and 04 are used without distinction)
05 – Execute Operation
07 – Read Device Status
08 – Loopback Test
16 – Store Multiple Setpoints

VIII.1.3 Message examples

Function codes 03 and 04 – Read Setpoints and Actual Values
Reading of settings, digital status, measurements and counters.
Example :
Remote address : 01
Address : 0400 - Data : 00aa
Address : 0401 - Data : 00ff
Question:
Description Bytes Example (hex)
Remote address - 1 byte - 01
Function code 1 byte - 03
Data address - 2 bytes 03 data address
08
Data number - 2 bytes - 00 Data number (words)
02
CRC - 2 bytes - xx
xx
Answer :
Function code - 1 byte - 03
Bytes counter - 1 byte - 04 2 records = 4 bytes
Data1 - 2 bytes - 00 Value in 0400
aa
ff
CRC - 2 byte - xx
xx

Function 05 code – Execute Operation

Execute operation.
Example :
Remote address 01
Code operation : 01 (Command number 1)
Question :
Operation code - 2 byte - 01 Command 1
- 00
Operation range - 2 byte - ff Execute command
- 00
CRC - 2 byte - xx
xx
Answer :
Operation code - 2 byte - 01 Command 1
- 00
Value - 2 byte - ff Execute command
- 00
CRC - 2 byte - xx
xx
Function code 07 – Read Device Status

Reading of the protection status.
Question :
CRC - 2 byte - xx
xx

Answer :
Status - 1 byte - 04
CRC - 2 byte - xx
xx
Function 08 code – Loopback Test

Link state test (communications).
Question :
Function code 1 byte - 08
Code - 2 byte - 00 must be 0
00
Data - 2 byte - 00 must be 0
00
CRC - 2 byte - xx
xx
Answer :
Code - 2 byte - 00 must be 0
00
Data - 2 byte - 00 must be 0
00
CRC - 2 byte - xx
xx
Function 16 codes – Read Setpoints and Actual Values

Writing of protection values
Example :
Remote address: 01
Address : 1000 - Data : 0144
Address : 1001 - Data : 0255
Question:

Data initial address - 2 bytes - 10 Data address
00
Data number - 2 bytes - 00 Data number (words)
02
Bytes counter - 1 byte - 04 2 registers = 4 bytes
44
55
CRC - 2 bytes - xx
xx
Answer :
Data initial address - 2 bytes - 10 Data address
00
Data number - 2 bytes - 00 Data numbers (words)
02
CRC - 2 bytes - xx
xx
VIII.1.4 Unit status request

It is made with function: 07 – Read Device Status
The unit status byte contains following information:
Bit 0 : Error in ADC converter

Bit 1 : Non critical error
Bit 2 : Critical error
Bit 3 : Protection in service
The same information can be obtained by reading the address 0009h.

VIII.1.5 Change request of digital signals

There is a mechanism, which allows collecting information of all digital signals changes along with the time instant
when they occurred..
By reading the address 05000h it can be obtained the number of pending changes in the buffer.
From the address 05002h a buffer is available, where the 25 oldest unit changes can be read. Once received a
message of changes, writing the value 0 in the address 05001h the master position validates the changes sent in the
message.
It is always demanded that the request comes with the initial address of the buffer of changes (05002h).
It is demanded that the number of words required is multiple of 5 (it must be read blocks of complete changes).
It cannot be asked for more data than the buffer size or than the number of changes in queue (it means, if there is
only one pending change, it is not possible to ask for two).
Given that the maximum number of words, which can be sent in a message, is 127 (limited for the field of number of
bytes in 1 byte), the buffer of changes is sized to contain 25 changes.
25 changes * 5 words / change = 125 words. (250 bytes).
To know how many changes there are in a zone of changes reading it must be done a reading of the number of pending
changes in the buffer through a reading of the address 05000h. In the low byte of the read register we will find the
number of pending changes (which will be a number between 0 and 25) and in the byte 15 of the register it can be
read the overflow indication of the changes in queue (for value 1 an overflow in the changes queue has occurred).
Afterwards, changes can be requested up to the maximum number previously indicated. To validate the changes
received we must write the value 0 in the address 05001h through the function 16. This writing makes possible that
the changes in the remote station are considered as sent; otherwise the remote station would consider them again as
pending.
If the remote station had more changes, which would be indicated in the value of the number of pending changes and
the master station could request them by repeating the process.
To collect all the changes of the remote station, the process would have to continue until the reading of the pending
changes indicates value 0..
Structure format of a digital change :

Changes : IDC + Binary time
IDC := CP 16{IDENTIF, CHANGE}

IDENTIF := UI 10[1..10] <0..1023>
CHANGE := BS 6{Res, V, E, v, e}
with Res := BS 2[11..12] not used (always <0>)
V := BS 1[13] <0..1>
<0> := Valid status
<1> := Not valid status
E := BS 1[14] <0..1>
<0> := Status as "0" after the change
<1> := Status as "1" after the change
v := BS 1[15] <0..1>

<0> := The validation bit V has not changed
<1> := The validation bit V has changed
e := BS 1[16] <0..1>
<0> := The status bit E has not changed
<1> := The status bit E has changed
With these two bytes and by assigning a code for each signal, it is identified each digital signal of control which has
suffered any change and which is transmitted with the control measurements, as well as what has changed in the
digital signal and the status and validation after the change.
CP56Time2a:=CP56{Milliseconds, Minutes, Res1, Invalid, Hours, Res2, Summer time, Day of the month, Day of the
week, Month, Res3, Year, Res4}
This binary time is defined in the section 6.8 of the document IEC 870-5-4. The day of the week corresponding to
value 1 is Sunday.
The complete structure of the change has therefore the following format:
IDENFTIF
e v E V Reserve IDENTIF
Milliseconds (LSByte)
Milliseconds (MSByte)
IV RES1 Minutes (6 bits)
SU RES2 HOURS (5 bits)
DAY OF THE WEEK (3 bits) DAY OF THE MONTH (5 bits)
RES3 MONTH (4 bits)
RES4 YEAR (7bits)
VIII.1.6 Data request by user map

The user map allows the non-consecutive registers reading in a single message.
It has an address zone (from the address 0180h, 124 registers) and a values zone in the user map (from the address
0100h , 124 records).
In the address zone it must be written through the function 16 the addresses of those registers we wish to read..
Through the reading of the data zone it could be read the data whose addresses have been configured.
It could be read or written from any of the user map addresses, as long as the end of them is not exceeded. It is
demanded that the read addresses of the user map have associated a valid address in its address zone (this type of
request is limited to the data zone: signals, Measurements and counters, addresses between the 0400 and the
0480h).
VIII.1.7 Synchronization
From 00f0h on:
Address MSB LSB

00f0h Milliseconds Milliseconds
00f1h Hours Minutes
00f2h Month Day
00f3h - Year

The synchronization of the unit is carried out through function 16, writing the 4 words in the indicated address. The
partial writing of any date is not allowed, but the complete structure writing.
The unit does not carry out any correction of the received value so the central centre will take into account the delay
of the communication channel in order to correct the date and time to be sent.
In this address the current time of the unit can also be read. Any address can be read as long as it range does not
exceed the address 00f3h.
VIII.1.8 Commands execution

The commands execution can be performed in two ways: with function 05 or with function 16.
To execute a command through function 05 to the value of the field “operation code” must be sent the command
number and to the field “Operation value” must be sent the value 0xff00 (Execute command).
To execute a command through function 16, the command code must be written in the command address (0080h).
Only 1 register writing is accepted.
VIII.1.9 Error codes

The unit can send the following error codes in answer to a message:
01 - Non implemented function
02 - Illegal address in the data field (reserved address or non valid range for required operation)
03 -> Illegal data value
Causes for error code sending :
Reading function (03,04) :

It can not be read more than 127 registers : 03 -> Illegal data value
Reserved or unknown initial address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field.
Number of data required exceeds the allowed range according to data type: 03 -> Illegal data value
Change request where the number of registers is not multiple of 5 or exceeds the number of changes data: 03 ->
Illegal data value
Data request through user map with a non-configured or illegal address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field
Writing function (16):

The bytes counter field does not correspond with field “registers number”: 03 -> Illegal data value
Reserved or unknown initial address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field
Configuration of the user map with a reserved or illegal address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field
VIII.2. PARAMETERS
The following parameters can be accessible through keyboard/display:
Address of remote station: Address in respect to the protocol MODBUS/RTU.
Value between 1 and 255 (broadcast address 0 non admitted).
Baud rate : Value between 300 and 38400 bauds.
Parity: None, Odd or Even

Waiting time for the RTS activation: Waiting delay after receiving a message and before activating the RTS signal for
transmission. Value between 0 and 1000 msec.
Waiting time for carrier stabilisation: Waiting delay once activated the RTS signal before transmitting the first character of the
message. Value between 0 and 1000 msec.
For the case of RS485 this waiting delay is necessary and it must have a minimum value of 4 msec. Value between 0 and
1000 msec.
Waiting time for deactivation of RTS : Waiting delay after the transmission of a message and before deactivating the RTS
signal. Value between 4 and 1000 msec.
VIII.3. UNIT ADDRESSES MAP

Address (hex) Description Range Step Unit Format Default value
Unit identification
0000 Function (manufacturer internal code) 2 charact "84"
0002 Rated current F04 "1"
0003 Voltage F05 "A"
0004 Frequency F06 "U"
0005 Options F07 "B0"
0007 Communications F08 "4"
0008 Software version F03
0009 Protection status F09
Command address (Write Only)
0080 Command code to execute F10
System date and Hour
00F0 Milliseconds 0-59999 F11
00F1 Hours and Minutes 0-24 / 0-59 F12
00F2 Month and Day 0-12 / 0-31 F13
00F3 Year 0-99 F14
User map
0100 User map values (124 values)
017C User map addresses (124 values)
Reading zone
0400 Digital status 1 F15
0406 Digital status reserve (10 registers)
042A Measurement 1 (see "Measurements to control") -4095 to 4095 1 Internal F21
042B Measurement 2 -4095 to 4095 1 Internal F21
042C Measurement 3 -4095 to 4095 1 Internal F21
042D Measurement 4 -4095 to 4095 1 Internal F21
042E Measurement 5 -4095 to 4095 1 Internal F21
042F Measurement 6 -4095 to 4095 1 Internal F21
0430 Measurement 7 -4095 to 4095 1 Internal F21
0431 Measurement 8 -4095 to 4095 1 Internal F21
.. .. .. .. ..
042C Measurements reserve 1 F21
04AA Counter 1 0-4294967295 1 F02
04AB Counter 2 0-4294967295 1 F02
04AC Counter 3 0-4294967295 1 F02
04AD Counter 4 0-4294967295 1 F02
.. .. .. .. ..
0458 Counters reserve (40 registers, 20 counters) 1 F02
Zone of status changes in digital signals
05000 Number of changes waiting to be sent 0 ..25 F01
05001 Validation of the sent changes (Write Only)) 0 F01

Address (hex) Description Range Step Unit Format Default value

05002 Digital changes reading zone (250 registers) F22
Free memory zone
05FC Free --
HF Free --
Measurements starting from the address 0410h will be the ones to be programmed. The order in which they are sent is also
programmable. The programming is carried out through the Protections console SIPCON/P. It is allowed up to a maximum of
64 values
The value of the measurements sent can be found in internal units (value between ±4095). Each value will have associated a
scale range, which could permit obtaining the value in physical units.
In the same way, the digital states and the order they are sent in are programmable, as well as the commands.
For more information about the available magnitudes as well as their scale ranges consult the section: Other Functions ->
Control Messages.
VIII.4. DATA FORMATS

Name Format Description
F01 16 bits without sign Range: 0.. 65535
F02 32 bits without sign Range : 0 .. 4294967295
F03 16 bits 1 ascii character (value in low byte of the register)
F04 ASCII 1 ascii character (value in low byte of the register)
F07 ASCII 2 ascii characters (value in low byte of the register)
Compacted bit (Bit to 1 activated indication)
Bit 0 : Error in ADC converter
Bit 1 : Non critical error
F09 16 bits without sign
Bit 2 : Critical error
Bit 3 : Protection in service
Bit 4 to 15 : Non used
Value : Associated command
0 : Command 0
F10 16 bits without sign 1 : Command 1
...
n : Command n
F11 16 bits without sign Range : 0 .. 59999
Bit 0 to 7 : Minutes (Value between 0 and 59)
F12 16 bits
Bit 8 to 15 : Hours (Value between 0 and 23)
Bit 0 to 7 : Day (Value between 1 and 31)
F13 16 bits
Bit 8 to 15 : Month (Value between 1 and 12)
Bit 0 to 7 : Year (Value between 0 and 99)
F14 16 bits
Bit 8 to 15 : Value 0, non used
Compacted bit (Bit for 1 activated digital signal)
Bit 0 : Digital signal 0
F15 16 bits


F16 16 bits Bit 7 : Digital signal 23
Compacted bit (Bit for 1activated digital signal)


Bit 2 : Digital signal 82..
Analogue value (value in internal units)
MEA:=CP 16{OV, ER, Res, VALUE, S}
with OV:=BS 1[1] not used(always <0>)
ER:=BS 1[2] <0..1>
<0>:=VALUE valid
<1>:=VALUE not valid
Res:=BS 1[3] not used always<0>)
F21 16 bits
VALUE:= F 12[4..15] <0..+1-2-12>
S:=BS 1[16]
<0>:=VALUE positive
<1>:=VALUE negative
The overflow bit (Overflow, OV) is not used and it is set to "0". In case of VALUE overflow it is set to
its maximum positive value, 4,905. The maximum of VALUE can be 1.2 or 2.4 times the nominal
value .
Digital change structure (5 words)
IDC + Binary time
Byte 0..1: Change identifier
IDC:=CP 16{IDENTIF, CHANGE}
IDENTIF:=UI 10[1..10] <0..1023>
CHANGE:=BS 6{Res, V, E, v, e}
with Res:= BS 2[11..12] not used (always <0>)
V:= BS 1[13] <0..1>
<0> := Valid state
<1> := Non-valid state
E:= BS 1[14] <0..1>
<0> := State at "0" after the change
F22 80 bits <1> := State at "1" after the change
v:= BS 1[15] <0..1>
<0> := Validation bit V has not changed
<1> := Validation bit V has changed
e:= BS 1[16] <0..1>
<0> := State bit E has not changed
<1> := State bit E has changed
Byte 2..8: Binary time in 7 octets.
CP56Time2a:=CP 56{Milliseconds, Minutes, Res1, Invalid, Hours, Res2,Summer schedule, Day of
the month, Day of the week, Month, Res3, Year, Res4}
Byte 9 : Not used
(For more details consult the section about request of digital signal changes)

IEC 870-5-101 RTU PROTOCOL 
APPENDIX IX. IEC 870-5-101 RTU PROTOCOL

This function allows communicating with a telecontrol centre, by jeans of using the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol at
the level of control messages.
The unit behaves as a RTU remote centre.
The format per character is the following:
1 start bit.
8 information bits.
1 parity bit configurable between none, even and odd parity.
1 stop bit, configurable between 1 and 2 stop bits. The baud rate will be configurable among 400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and
38400 bauds.
IX.1. SETTINGS
Console text Display text Meaning
It allows identifying the number of the remote station at a link level. Value between 0
Link address LINK ADD. and 65534.
Default value 1.
It allows identifying the number of the remote station at an application level. Value
Application address APLICD. ADD. between 0 and 65534.
Default value 1.
It indicates if the communication is established in a balanced mode (1) or not (0).
Balanced mode BALANCED
Default value 1.
This Word-type parameter allows defining the bud rate.
Baud rate BAUDS Possible values: 0-38400, 1-19200, 2-9600, 3-4800, 4-2400, 5-1200, 6-300 bauds.
Default value 2.
This Word-type parameter allows selecting the available communication channel.
Channel type T.CHANNEL 0-Direct 1-by telephone.
Default value 0.
It allows selecting the parity to be used in the communication.
0 – Even parity
Parity PARITY 1 – No parity
2 – Odd parity.
Default value 0.
It allows selecting the number of stop. Bits.
0 - 1 stop bit.
Stop bits STOP BITS
2 - 2 stop bits.
Default value 0.
It allows selecting if RTS and CTS pin control is carried out
RTS/CTS Control RTS_CTS 0 - No. 1 – Yes.
Default value 0.
CTS activation waiting It indicates the time in which the function waits for the CTS activation, after the RTS
CTS WAIT T.
time(csec) activation (in csec). Value between 0 and 1000.Default value 0.
It indicates the time that has to be waited until the transmission starts, once the CTS is
Carrier waiting time(csec) CAR. WAIT T. activated, with the aim of stabilising the carrier (in csec).Value between 0 and 500.
Default value 0.
Waiting time until transmission after having received (in csec). Value between 0 and
500.
Recommended values:
RTS waiting time(csec) RTS ACT. T. 600 bauds - 4 csec.
1200 bauds - 3 csec.
2400, 4800 and 9600 bauds - 2csec.
Default value 0.
Waiting time until RTS deactivation after transmission (in csesc). Value between 0 and
500.
RTS deactivation time Recommended values:
RTS DEACT. T.
(csec) 600 bauds - 4 csec.
1200 bauds s - 3 csec.
2400, 4800 and 9600 bauds - 2cseg.


Default value 0.
Waiting Timeout until receiving received message confirmation (in csec). Value between
Response waiting time
RESP WAIT. T 1 and 500.
(csec)
Default value 100.
Minimum time that must elapse between two consecutive transmissions.(in csec). Value
between 1 and 100.
Recommended values:
Minimum time between 600 and 1200 bauds - 2 csec.
T.BETWEEN.TX
transmissions(csec) 2400 bauds – 3 csec
4800, 9600 and 19200 bauds - 5csec.
38400 bauds – 6 csec.
Default value 6.
Ii indicates the number of times a sent message is transmitted to a central centre, in

Transmission number TRANSM No. case confirmation is not received. Value between 0 and 5.
Default value 2.
“Address Field of the Number of bytes in the Address Field of the Link. Value between 1 and 2.
LONG.DIR_A
Link” Default value 2.
Number of bytes in the Cause of Transmission Field. Value between 1 and 2.
“Cause of Transmission” LONG.COT
Default value 1.
“Information Object Number of bytes in the Information Object Address Field. Value between 1 and 3.
LONG.IOA
Address” Default value 3.
Time format to be used in the chronological times.
0 – no time
1 – 3 bytes. Format CP24time2a
Time format TIME FORMAT
Default value 1.
It indicates if in the change message in the analogue measurements, the time in which
Measurements with time MEASUREMENT T. the change has occurred is sent (1) or not (0).
Default value 0.
It indicates if in the counter spontaneous frozen message, the time in which the frozen
Counters with time COUNTER T. has occurred is sent (1) or not (0).
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object type SP or simple signal. Value between 0 and
Simple signal address SP ADDRESS 65535.
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object type EV or event. Value between 0 and 65535.
Event address EV ADDRESS
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object type DP or double signal. Value between 0 and
Double signal address DP ADDRESS 65535.
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object type MEAS or analogue measurement. Value
Measurement address MEAS. ADDRESS between 0 and 65535.
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object type TAP or transformer tap. Value between 0 and
Tap address TAP. ADDRESS 65535.
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object counter type. Value between 0 and 65535.
Counter address CON. ADDRESS
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object bitstring type. Value between 0 and 65535.
Bitstrings address BIT. ADDRESS
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object C type simple order type. Value between 0 and
C Simple orders address OC ADDRESS 65535.
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object C0 type simple order type. Value between 0 and
C0 Simple orders
OC0 ADDRESS 65535..
address
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object C1 type double order type. Value between 0 and
C1 Double order address OC1 ADDRESS 65535..
Default value 0.
C2 double order address C2 ADDRESS Address of the first information object C2 type double order type. Value between 0 and


65535.
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object measurement parameter type. Value between 0
Measurement parameter
PAR ADDRESS and 65535.
address
Default value 0..
System information signal address with the change queue full. Value between 0 and
Queue full indication
FULL ADDRESS 65535.
address
Default value 0..
System information signal address with the change queue full at the percent indicated
Queue half-full indication
HALF-FULL ADDRESS in the setting X_PC_LL. . Value between 0 and 65535.
address
Default value 0..
System information signal address with the indication of GPS installed in the system.
GPS indication address GPS ADDRESS Value between 0 and 65535.
Default value 0.
System information signal address with the indication that the system is correctly
GPS synchronised
SYNCHR. ADDRESS synchronised by GPS. Value between 0 and 65535.
indication address
Default value 0.
Change queue capacity for which a fulling alarm is given ( in %). Value between 0
Queue fulling (%) % FULLING and100.
Default value 80
Change queue capacity for which the previous alarm is deactivated (in %). Value
Queue emptying (%) % EMPTYING between de 0 and 100.
Default value 20.
The event state refreshing start word in the digital signal status buffer (in %). Value
Event refreshing position EVENT WORD between e0 and 128.
Default value 128 (in case of no events).
Command or order execution mode.
Mode 1 (0) – direct execution
Mode 2 (1) – selection previous to the execution.
Mode 3 (2) – simple order and writings in direct execution and double orders
and regulation commands with previous selection.
Command execution mode COMMAND MODE
Mode 4 (3) – simple order and writings with previous selection and double
orders and regulation commands in direct execution.
Mode 6 (5) – simple order with previous selection. These simple orders
contemplate the OFF/ON treatment. That way, it is not allowed to have other type orders.
Default value Mode 6.
It indicates if the return information associated to the commands is sent or if the
Activation Ending message is used for the orders.
Mode 1 (0) – no return information either ACTTERM
eturn command Mode 2 (1) – SENT AS return information and ACTTERM
COMMAND INF
information usage Mode 3 (2) – Return information is sent to all the orders and ACTTERM only for
analogue writings
Mode 4 (3) – ACTTERM message is sent for all the commands. Default value
Mode 4.
Periodical counter operation mode
Mode 1 (0) – they are automatically frozen with the request
Mode 2 (1) – they are not automatically frozen with the request
Counter freeze FREEZE
Mode 3 (2) – they are frozen in each spontaneous periodical and in the
initialization as invalid.
Default value Mode 3.
It indicates if the measurement parameters have the same address as their
Measurement parameter measurements (1) or they have their own address. In this case, its start address is given
MEAS_PAR ADD.
address by the setting D_OD_PAR (0).
Default value 1.
It indicates if the 101 profile used is the 101 Meta Reduced Profile.
Meta reduced profile META PROFILE
Default value 0.
It indicates if the system has the GPS installed.
GPS GPS
Default value 0.
Transmission factor time, in order to correct the time received in the synchronization
message, due to delays in its sending (in cesc).
Time correction factor TRANSM. FACT.
Value between 0 and 1000.
Default value 0.
Maximum number of bytes the asdu can have. Value between 50 and 255.
ASDU maximum size ASDU SIZE
Default value 255.
It indicates if the messages have to be sent compacted during the general interrogation
SQ bit usage SQ BIT USE
process (1) or not (0).


Default value 1.
It indicates if the Activation Confirmation message sending of the synchronization
Broadcast synchronization command has to be inhibited when this is sent with broadcast address. At1, this
SYNCHRO. RESP.
response message is not sent.
Default value 0.
Period in minutes of the cyclical measurement sending. Value between 0 and 60. UIT
Cyclical measurement
MEAS.PERIOD value 0, measurements are not sent.
period (min)
Default value 0.
IX.2. TABLES
The screens have to be set with the data base to be sent to the central centre via Protocol 101, in the communication
console. These setting screens are the following ones:
Digital signals 101 configuration

In this table the simple and double signalling type signals are introduced and also bitstring signal in case they are available.
The following fields must be defined:
NUMBER 101: Signal number indicating in which position of the STATE buffer its corresponding bit is going to be
refreshed. They are numbered from 1 to 2048 possible signals.
For simple signals, it starts in 1 and the following ones are consecutive, and in case of existing gaps they must not be
introduced.
For events, given the start Word of the event state refreshing in the STATE buffer, the first value of the NUMBER field
hast to be calculated with this Word given by PO_EV.
first event: PO_EV x 16 + 1
The following ones are consecutive, and in case of existing gaps they must not be introduced.
For double signals, indications of open, close, undetermined and discordant status will be given, but, as they only have
two bits to indicate the state of a double signal, the undetermined and the discordant states take the same number as
the closed state, refreshing the corresponding bits as 00 and 11 respectively.
This field NUMBER for double signals is calculated from the variable PO_DP, having that the first double signal will have in
the NUMBER field the same value as the one resulting from calculating:
PO_DP x 16 + 1, for the open state
PO_DP x 16 + 2, for the close state, undetermined and discordant.
being PO_DP a Word number between 0 and 127, which locates the double signals between the events and the bitstrings and
it indicates the start word of the refreshing of the double digital signal states.
If in the database there are events, the operation to calculate start Word of the double signals is the one below:
PO_DP = PO_EV + (no. of events - 1) / 16 + 1
If there is no event, most habitual case, this parameter is calculated from the simple signals:
PO_DP = (no. of simple signals - 1) / 16 + 1
For the first Bitstring 32 signals will be available (1 per every bitstring bit) and so 32 registers with the NUMBER fields.
PO_ BITS x 16 +1 .............................. PO_BITS x 16 + 32
being PO_BITS a word number between 0 and 127, locating the bitstrings as the last element to be refreshed in the buffer
after the double signals.
In order to calculate this word, the same explained for double signals is applied. In order to calculate how much the double
signal occupy, take into account that each signal needs two bits, so that in each Word only 8 double signals are refreshed.
The operation to calculate the start word of the bitstrings is the following one:

PO_BITS = PO_DP + (no. Of double signals - 1) / 8 + 1
The only thing to take into account the size in words of the previous signals inside the buffer.
BD SIGNAL: It indicates the signal number in the database of the PD300.
NELEM: It indicates the element number inside those of its type.
For simple signals, it coincides with the NUMERO field.

For events, it must continue as if they were simple signals, because internally they are treated in the same way. If between
the last simple signal and the first event there is a step in the numeration, it has to be observed in this field.
For double signals, it mist start in 1 again. If, in case of double signals, several registers have been refilled with the
different signals status, open, close, undetermined and discordant, these registers belong to the same signal, so the
NELEM fields has to be the same for all of them.
The same will occur in the case of the Bitstring, which have 32 registers of the table with the same field NELEM.
REVERSE: it indicates if the reverse signal state is waited.
TYPE: It indicates the signal 101 type:
TYPE ELEMENT TYPE

0 Simple signalling type element
1 Double signalling type element
2 Bitstring type element
CIN: It indicates the incidence code for double signals
CIN INCIDENCE INTERNAL CODE

0 Simple signalling or bitstring value change
1 Signalling value change to open
2 Signalling value change to close
3 Signalling value change to undetermined
4 Signalling value change to discordant
101 measurement configuration

In this table the measurement of normalized, scaled and tap type. The following fields have to be defined:
NUMBER 101: Number of measurement respecting the protocol 870-5-l01. They start numbering from 1 up to 128 possible
measurements. In case of sags in the database, those registers must not be introduced in the table.
BD MEASUREMENT: It indicates the measurement number in the database of the PD300.
DEADBAND: Magnitude of the change in the measurement in order to be sent to the canter. A value higher than the 1% of
the background scale is recommended.
For type 2 measurements, this field is not taken into account because any change in this type of measurements will be sent
to the centre.
PERIOD: Time during which a change in a signal must be maintained in order to be sent to a centre. It will be given in
hundredths of seconds.
LOW: Low limit under which a measurement will be sent to the centre as alarm.
For type 2 measurements, this field is not taken into account because any change in this type of measurement will be sent to
the centre.
HIGH: High limit over which a measurement will be sent to the centre as alarm.
For type 2 measurements, this field is not taken into account because any change in this type of measurement will be sent to
the centre.
In the case of the limits, both high and low, we do not pay attention to the change magnitude, but in the limits of a zone. If it
exceeds from the zone given between the high and low limits, they are sent to the centre, although it is very small. In the
same way, it had previously exceeded, the value of the measurement has a value between the limits again.

BACKGROUND: Scale background for scales measurements, real engineering value corresponding to the measurement
maximum value (4095 counts).
If spontaneous changes in measurements are not desired to be sent, it is recommended to set value of the LOWLIM field to
its minimum value, -4095, and HIGHLIM and BTRATA to its maximum value, which are 4095 and 8190 counts,
respectively.
TYPE: measurement 101 type:
0 – Single-direction measurement.- F16. TYPE Normalized

1 - Two-direction measurement. - I16. TYPE Scaled
2 - Direct measurement - TAP. Transformer tap
The measurements in this table are in a rising order according to its type, that is, firstly the normalized, the scales and last
the taps.
101 counter configuration

In this table the normalized, the scaled and the tap type measurements are introduced. The following fields have to be
defined.
NUMBER 101: Counter number respecting the protocol 870-5-l01. They start numbering from 1 up to 64 possible
measurements. In case of sags between the counters in the database, those registers must not be introduced in the table.
COUNTER BD: It indicates the counter number in the database of the PD300
PERIOD: Spontaneous frozen period and sending of the periodical counter. The period, in minutes, for the counter
accumulation will be divisor of 60 minutes. A 15-minute value is recommended for the counter period. All the counters that
are desired to send to the centre in a cyclical way have to have the same period different to zero in the PERIOD field.
If the counter periodical sending is not desired to be treated, the PERIOD field has to be set to zero.
GROUP: Group the counter for the counter request by groups belong to.
If the counters do not have an assigned group, since the central centre does not use the counter request by groups, the
GROUP field must be set to zero, so only the counter period will appear.
More than 4 different groups are not allowed for the counters in the database counters.
101 order configuration

The following fields have to be defined foe each order:
101 NUMBER: Information object address (IOA) of the order in the protocol IEC 870-5-101.
ORDEN BD: Order in the database of the PD300
ON / OFF: Status ON / OFF of the order
TYPE: Type of element over which the return information is received
0 – Simple signal
1 – Double signal
SIGNAL: Inside of those f this type for the return information. This information is the same as the NELEM field of the signal
tables.
STATE: This field has different meaning depending on the order type.
In the case of simple orders, it indicates the end state of the signal the order is associated to, simple or double.
In the case of double orders, it indicates if the expected state has to come reversed or not.
If the setting Command Execution Mode is at value Mode 6, the simple orders must be introduced in the table as double
orders respecting the information object address that corresponds to them as simple signals. That is, they are introduced as
simple orders but taking into account in this STATE field that they are treated as double orders.

TIMING: It indicates the timing in hundredths of seconds, which have to be waited until the return information associated to
the order, is received.
Signal and measurement group 101 Configuration

If the interrogation by groups wants to be enabled, the following fields should be defined for each group:
GROUP: Group number. This number can be any from 1 to 16. they do not have to be consecutive and there can be gaps.
IOA START: This field contains the information object address of the first group element. This address have to be a signal or
measurement valid signal.
IOA END: This field contains the information object address of the last group element. . This address have to be a signal or
measurement valid signal and it must be of the same type as the address of the first element.
In the case of Meta Reduced profile, the Measurement Interrogation as group 16 is used, so this group will have to be
configured in the table.
IX.3. INTEROPERABILITY PROFILE IEC 870 – 5 – 101

The IEC 870 – 5 – 101 protocol profile, implemented in the protection PD300, is defined bellow, by marking with a “” the
parameters selected among those in the parameter set and alternatives indicated by he standard.
IX.3.1 System or device (specific parameter of the system)

 System definition
 Control station definition (Master
 Control station definition (Master
IX.3.2 System configuration (system specific parameter)

 Point-to-point  Multipoint-party line
 Multiple point-to-point  Multpoint-star
IX.3.3 Physical layer (system specific parameter)

Baud rate (control address)
Unbalanced
interchange circuit
Unbalanced V.24/V.28
interchange circuit Recommended if >
V.24/V.28 Standard 1200 bit/s Balanced Interchange Circuit X.24/X.27
 100 bit/s  2 400 bit/s  2 400 bit/s  56 000 bit/s
 300 bit/s  9 600 bit/s  9 600 bit/s
 600 bit/s  19 200 bit/s
 1 200 bit/s  38 400 bit/s
Baud rate (monitor address)

Unbalanced
Interchange Circuit
Unbalanced V.24/V.28
Interchange Circuit Recommended if >
V.24/V.28 Standard 1200 bit/s Balanced Interchange Circuit X.24/X.27
 300 bit/s  9 600 bit/s  9 600 bit/s
 600 bit/s  19 200 bit/s
 1 200 bit/s  38 400 bit/s
IX.3.4 Link layer (system specific parameter)

The mesh FT 1.2 format, the simple character and the fixed time out interval are exclusively used in this standard.
Link Transmission Procedure Address Field of the Link
 Balanced transmission  Not present (balanced transmission only)
 Unbalanced transmission  One octet

 Two octets
Frame Length  Structured
255 Maximum length L (control direction)  Unstructured
255 Maximum length L (monitor direction)
When the non-balanced link layer is used, the following ASDU types are return as class 2 messages (low priority) with the
following transmission causes:
 ASDU Standard assignation to class 2 messages is used as follows:
Identification type Transmisión cause
9, 11, 13, 21 <1>

 A special ASDU assignation to class 2 messages is used as follows:
Identification type Transmisión cause
1, 3, 5, 7 <5>, <20 – 36>
9, 11 <1>, <3>, <5>, <20 – 36>
15, 16, 37, 132 <37 – 41>
10, 12, 34, 35, 131 <3>
45, 46, 100, 101 <7>, <10>
102 <5>
47, 48, 49, 104, 105, 110, 111, 113 <7>
IX.3.5 Application layer

Transmission mode for application data
Mode 1 (first of all the least significative byte), as it is defined in the clausule 4.10 of the IEC 870-5-4, is exclusively
used in standard.
ASDU common address (system specific parameter)

 One octet  Two octets
Information object address (system specific parameter)

 One octet  Structured
 Two octets  Unstructured
 Three octets
Transmission cause (system specific parameter)

 One octet  Two octets (with originator address)

ASDUs Standard selection

Process information in the monitor address (station specific parameter)
 <1> := Single-point information M_SP_NA_1
 <2> := Single-point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1
 <3> := Double-point information M_DP_NA_1
 <4> := Double-point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1
 <5> := Step position information M_ST_NA_1
 <6> := Step position information with time tag M_ST_TA_1
 <7> := Bitstring of 32 bit M_BO_NA_1

 <8> := Bitstring of 32 bit with time tag M_BO_TA_1
 <9> := Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1
 <10> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_ME_TA_1
 <11> := Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1
 <12> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag M_ME_TB_1
 <13> := Measured value, short floating-point value M_ME_NC_1
 <14> := Measured value, short floating-point value with time tag M_ME_TC_1
 <15> := Integrated totals M_IT_NA_1
 <16> := Integrated totals with time tag M_IT_TA_1
 <17> := Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TA_1
 <18> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TB_1
 <19> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time M_EP_TC_1
tag
 <20> := Packed single-point information with status change detection M_PS_NA_1

 <21> := Measured value, normalized value without quality descriptor M_ME_ND_1
 <30> := Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a M_SP_TB_1
 <31> := Double-point information with time tag CP56Time2a M_DP_TB_1
 <32> := Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a M_ST_TB_1
 <33> := Bitstring of 32 bit with time tag CP56Time2a M_BO_TB_1
 <34> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TD_1
 <35> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TE_1
 <36> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_ME_TF_1
CP56Time2a
 <37> := Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a M_IT_TB_1
 <38> := Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TD_1
 <39> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TE_1
CP56Time2a

 <40> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with M_EP_TF_1

time tag CP56Time2a
 <128> := Single-point information with time tag CP40Time2a M_SP_TB_1
 <129> := Double-point information with time tag CP40Time2a M_DP_TB_1
 <130> := Step position information with time tag CP40Time2a M_ST_TB_1
 <131> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP40Time2a M_ME_TD_1
 <132> := Integrated totals with time tag CP40Time2a M_IT_TB_1
Process information in the control address (station specific parameter)

 <45> := Single command C_SC_NA_1
 <46> := Double command C_DC_NA_1

 <47> := Regulating step command C_RC_NA_1
 <48> := Set point command, normalized values C_CE_NA_1
 <49> := Set point command, scaled value C_SE_NB_1
 <50> := Set point command, short floating-point value C_SE_NC_1
 <51> := Bitstring of 32 bit C_BO_NA_1
System information in the monitor address (station specific parameter)

 <70> := End of initialization M_EI_NA_1
System information in the control address (station specific parameter)

 <100> := Interrogation command C_IC_NA_1
 <101> := Counter interrogation command C_CI_NA_1
 <102> := Read command C_RD_NA_1
 <103> := Clock synchronization command C_CS_NA_1
 <104> := Test command C_TS_NB_1
 <105> := Reset process command C_RP_NC_1
 <106> := Delay acquisition command C_CD_NA_1
Parameters in the control address (station specific parameter)

 <110> := Parameter of measured value, normalized value (threshold only) P_ME_NA_1
 <111> := Parameter of measured value, scaled value P_ME_NB_1
 <112> := Parameter of measured value, short floating-point value P_ME_NC_1
 <113> := Parameter activation P_AC_NA_1
File transfer (station specific parameter)

 <120> := File ready F_FR_NA_1
 <121> := Section ready F_SR_NA_1
 <122> := Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_SC_NA_1

 <123> := Last section, last segment F_LS_NA_1
 <124> := Ack file, ack section F_AF_NA_1
 <125> := Segment F_SG_NA_1
 <126> := Directory F_DR_TA_1
Type identifying and assigned transmission causes (station specific parameter)

Type identification Transmission cause
20 37
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 44 45 46 47
to to
36 41
<1> M_SP_NA_1    
<2> M_SP_TA_1  
<3> M_DP_NA_1    
<4> M_DP_TA_1  
<5> M_ST_NA_1   
<6> M_ST_TA_1 
<7> M_BO_NA_1  
<8> M_BO_TA_1 
<9> M_ME_NA_1    
<10> M_ME_TA_1 
<11> M_ME_NB_1    
<12> M_ME_TB_1 
<13> M_ME_NC_1
<14> M_ME_TC_1
<15> M_IT_NA_1  
<16> M_IT_TA_1  
<17> M_EP_TA_1
<18> M_EP_TB_1
<19> M_EP_TC_1
<20> M_PS_NA_1
<21> M_ME_ND_1
<30> M_SP_TB_1  
<31> M_DP_TB_1  
<32> M_ST_TB_1 
<33> M_BO_TB_1 
<34> M_ME_TD_1 
<35> M_ME_TE_1 
<36> M_ME_TF_1
<37> M_IT_TB_1  
<38> M_EP_TD_1
<39> M_EP_TE_1
<40> M_EP_TF_1
<45> C_SC_NA_1   
<46> C_DC_NA_1   

Type identification Transmission cause
20 37
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 44 45 46 47
to to
36 41
<47> C_RC_NA_1  
<48> C_CE_NA_1  
<49> C_SE_NB_1  
<50> C_SE_NC_1
<51> C_BO_NA_1
<70> M_EI_NA_1 
<100> C_IC_NA_1   
<101> C_CI_NA_1   
<102> C_RD_NA_1 
<103> C_CS_NA_1  
<104> C_TS_NB_1  
<105> C_RP_NC_1  
<106> C_CD_NA_1
<110> P_ME_NA_1  
<111> P_ME_NB_1  
<112> P_ME_NC_1
<113> P_AC_NA_1  
<120> F_FR_NA_1
<121> F_SR_NA_1
<122> F_SC_NA_1
<123> F_LS_NA_1
<124> F_AF_NA_1
<125> F_SG_NA_1
<126> F_DR_TA_1
<128> M_SP_TB_1  
<129> M_DP_TB_1  
<130> M_ST_TB_1 
<131> M_ME_TD_1 
<132> M_IT_TB_1  
IX.3.6 Application basic functions

Station initialization (station specific parameter)
 Remote initialization remota
Data cyclical transmission (station specific parameter)

 Data cyclical transmission
Reading procedure (station specific parameter)

 Reading procedure

Spontaneous transmission (station specific parameter)

 Spontaneous transmission
Double transmission of information objects with spontaneous transmisión cause(station specific

parameter)
The following element types can be transmitted in a succession caused by a simple state change in an information
object. The information object particular addresses for which the double transmission is enabled are defined in a
specific list of the project.
 Single point information M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1 and M_PS_NA_1
 Double point information M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1 and M_DP_TB_1
 Step position information M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1and M_ST_TB_1

 Bitstring of 32 bit M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1, M_BO_TB_1
 Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1 and M_ME_TD_1
 Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1 and M_ME_TE_1
 Measured value, short floating point number M_ME_NC_1 and M_ME_TC_1
General interrogation (station or system specific parameter)

The information object addresses assigned to each group must be shown in a separate table.
 Global
 Group 1  Group 7  Group 13
 Group 5  Group 11
 Group 6  Group 12
Clock synchronization (station specific parameter)

 Clock synchronization
Command transmission (station specific parameter)

 Direct command transmission  Select and execute command
 Direct set point command transmission  Select and execute set point command
 C-SE ACTTERM Used
 No additional definition
 Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the controlled station)
 Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the controlled station)
 Persistent output

Integrated total transmission (station or object specific parameter)

 Mode A: local freeze with spontaneous transmission
 Mode B: local freeze with counter interrogation
 Mode C: freeze and transmit by counter interrogation commands
 Mode D: freeze by counter interrogation command, frozen values reported spontaneously
 Counter read  General request counter

 Counter freeze without reset  Request counter group 1
 Counter freeze with reset  Request counter group 2
 Counter reset  Request counter group 3
 Request counter group 4
Addresses per group have to be defined
Parameter load (object specific parameter)

 Threshold value
 Smoothing factor
 Low limit for transmission of measured value
 High limit for transmission of measured value
Parameter activation(object specific parameter)

 Act/deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
Test procedure (station specific parameter)

 Test
File transfer (station specific parameter)

File transfer in monitor address
 Transparent file
 Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment

 Transmission of sequence of events
 Transmission of sequence of recorded analogue values
File transfer in control address

 Transparent file
Background scan (station specific parameter)

 Background scan
Acquisition of transmission delay (station specific parameter)

 Acquisition of transmission delay

IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL 
APPENDIX X. IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL

The IEC870-5-103 communication module implemented in the protection unit allows the communication as a slave station with
the master centre through the communication rear port (RS232, RS485 or Optical Fibre)
X.1. 870-5-103 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL FUNCTION

The module implements the communication protocol, based in the IEC60870-5-103, in the protection, in order to
communicate with a primary centre which has the protocol IEC60870-5-103 implemented. Its objective is collecting oscillo
data, protection signalling and measurements, as well as receiving commands or orders.
The transmission and reception mesh formats are set to the FT1.2 mesh format explained in section 6.2.4.2 of IEC 870-5-1
standard.
The format per character:
1 start bit.
8 information bits
1 parity bit, selectable between without parity or even parity
1 stop bit, selectable between 1 and 2 stop bits.
The baud rate will be selected among, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400.
The communication is carried out through the communication rear connector (RS232, RS485 or Optical Fibre).
In the same way the following functions are implemented:
Initialization.
Clock synchronization.
General interrogation
General commands
Perturbation data transmission.
The implemented functions are described in the standard IEC870-5-103. The application layer is based in the international
standards IEC 870-5-3 (general structure of application data), IEC 870-5-4 (Definition and coding of the application
information elements), IEC 870-5-5 (Application basic functions).
The basic ASDUS implemented are described in the document IEC870-5-103 and they are:
ASDUs Compatible in Secondary to Primary direction.

<1> Message with time label.
<2> Message with time label and relative time.
<5> Identification.
<6> Clock synchronization.
<8> General interrogation end.
<9> Measurements II. With a variable number of measurements.
<23> Stored perturbation list.
<28> Ready for the perturbation digital signal transmission.
<29> Digital signal transmission.

<30> Perturbation value transmission.
<31> Transmission end
ASDUs Compatibles en Dirección de Primario a Secundario.

<6> Clock synchronization.
<7> General interrogation start.
<20> General commands.
<24> Perturbation data transmission command.
<25> Perturbation data transmission acknowledge
X.2. SETTINGS
Associated text Meaning
It allows the identification of the number of the remote station. Value between 0 and 254.
LCU ADDRESS
Default value 1.
This word-type parameter allows fixing the baud rate: 600 – 1200 – 2400 – 4800 – 9600 – 19200
BAUD RATE - 38400 bauds.
Default value 9600
It allows the selection of the parity type to be used during the transmission. Even, odd or without
PARITY T. parity
The recommended default value is even, according to the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
It allows the selection of the stop bit number. 1 or 2 stop bits
STOP BITS
The recommended default value is 1 stop bit according to the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
RTS activation waiting time. Waiting time after receiving a message and before activating the RTS
RTS.ACT T
signal for transmission. Value between 0 and 2000(milliseconds).
Carrier stabilization waiting time. Waiting time once the RTS signal is activated and before
CARRIER T.
transmitting the first message character. Value between 0 and 2000(milliseconds).
RTS deactivation waiting time. Waiting time after the transmission of a message and before
RTS DEAC T.
deactivating the RTS signal. Value between 0 and 2000(milliseconds).
Sending format: Compatible or extended. 0->compatible VDEW. 1->Extended private range.
In compatible format :
SENDING FORMAT Control signals configured as compatible are only sent
Only three measurements are sent in the measurement ASDU
Commands configured as compatible are only accepted
For the correct operation of the perturbation data request function, the communication with the Procome console must be
carried out through the front port. In the ' Oscillo configuration' screen, in the “OSCILLO COMMUNICATION MODE” section,
you can choose between:
-->25.
-->maximum.
25 must be selected.

X.3. CONTROL SIGNALS

The control signals can be configured according to the console screen:
BD SIGNAL: It allows selecting the control signal within those existing in the unit.
TYP: Function Type.
INF: Information Number.
GI: It shows if the signal is included in the response to a general question. If this option is not selected, the changes
generated by the signal are only activation changes.
REVERSE: It reverses the signal state.
X.4. CONTROL ANALOGUE MEASUREMENTS

The control analogue measurements can be configured according to the console screen:
BD MEASUREMENT: It allows selecting a measurement from the data base.
NUMBER: It shows the position in the measurement ASDU.
This table is only valid when the SENDING FORMAT setting is in EXTENDED.
X.5. COMMANDS
The commands can be configured according to the console screen:
BD ORDER: It allows selecting an order from the BD

TYP: Function Type.
INF: Information Number.
DCO: It allows selecting from On and Off

IEC 61850 PROTOCOL 
APPENDIX XI. IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
XI.1. INTRODUCTION
This protocol, implemented in the protection devices, is based on the communication protocol defined in the IEC 61850
standard and described in the following documents:
 IEC61850-1: Introduction and overview

 IEC61850-2: Glossary
 IEC61850-3: General requirements
 IEC61850-4: System and project management
 IEC61850-5: Communication requirements for functions and device models
 IEC61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations related to IEDs
 IEC61850-7: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment
 IEC61850-7-1: Principles and models
 IEC61850-7-2: Abstract communication service interface (ACSI)
 IEC61850-7-3: Common Data Classes
 IEC61850-7-4: Compatible logical node classes and data classes
 IEC61850-8: Specific communication service mapping (SCSM)
 IEC61850-8-1: Mappings to MMS (ISO/IEC9506-1 and ISO/IEC 9506-2)
 IEC61850-9: Specific communication service mapping (SCSM)
 IEC61850-9-1: Sampled values over serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link
 IEC61850-9-2: Sampled values over ISO/IEC 8802-3
 IEC61850-10: Conformance testing
The Technical Committee 57 of the IEC (CT57) is in charge of developing and maintaining such standard. There is a
corporation called UCA User Group which works very closely to this Technical Committee and which assist the customers and
manufacturers in the integration of device owning this protocol. Ingeteam T&D is a member of this corporation.
The IEC 61850 standard defines some basic aspects: the local area network (LAN ethernet), communication protocols (TCP-
IP, MMS), the modeling of the substation elements and services (using XML language) as well as the engineering tools. The
architecture of an IEC 61850 system changes from master/slave to client/server.
One of the most remarkable aspects of the IEC 61850 standard is the use of horizontal messages between protection devices.
These messages called GOOSE (which are a subgroup of GSE: Generic Substation Event) can substitute physical wirings
between devices.
The use of XML language to describe the different elements and services of the substation is also a remarkable characteristic
of this protocol. The icd/cid files based on the XML are those files that describe the data model and services of a protection
and those that we will refer to all along this appendix.
The particular implementation characteristics of this protocol are described in the PICS, MICS, TICS and PIXIT documents
defined in the standard conformity test part
In conclusion, the protection device behaves as a IEC 61850 data and service server. All the information, together with its
organization is defined in an icd/cid configuration file (based on XML). All those protocol characteristics that can be conferred
to a IEC 61850 server according to this standard, can be applied.

XI.2. PREVIOUS STEPS TO CONFIGURE THE DEVICE

Each protection device is defined with a configuration file, with ICD extension (IED Capability description) in which all the
data and services (capabilities) supported in the protection is described. This file is supplied with the device.
This icd file has to be configured to be particularized and to be able to communicate with the IEC 61850 client of each
substation. Apart from introducing the communication part, the private ones (PIXIT), DataSets and Reports to be sent to each
client have also to be configured. Once this particularization has been done, the file changes into a CID file (Configured IED
Description), with which the device is completely configured for its integration in a certain substation.
In order to carry out all these steps and configure an IEC 61850 protection, Ingeteam T&D has developed a SW tool called
eFS (Energy Factory Suite). The eFS is a software tool for the IEC 61850 system automation which has multiple modules that
will be used to configure each substation protection devices;
The software module that will be used to configure the device in each substation is the pacFactory. The other modules
include in the eFS are not necessary.
The complete protection icd file particularization, to change it into a configured file (cid) is carried in some steps. These
steps will basically allow us:
 To communicate with the IEC 61850 client (HMI local, remote, RTU…).
 To serve data and services (synchronization, orders…) to the different customers of the substation. Peer-to-peer
horizontal communication between protection units (GOOSEs).
 Protection setting.
 Others…
By using the pacFactory modules, the protection will be easily configured, to be integrated within each IEC 61850
substation.
The steps would be the following:
1. Create and activate a project: From welcome window by clicking on “Project Factory” button you can create and activate a
project.
2. Select an IED: Created and activated the project, the button “start” is enabled opening the IEDs list configured in the
project. By clicking on “Continue” button or double click on IED selected, access the environment configuration.
If this is the first time you access to project (there will be no IED in the list). It will be necessary to import.

XI.2.1 IED Import to project
To import an IED to project, you have two options;
 Import the IED from file; for this option is not necessary to communicate with any device.
 Import the IED from device; automatic detection of network devices.
If you select this button you detect all network devices. And the following window appears.
The first thing to consider is to check the device is between subnet ranges to communicate properly.
For this, you need to add the subnet device to PC network card or change the IP address device for belonging to the
same network PC. This last option is probably faster and easier.
To change the IP address from any device, select on list and by clicking on “Change IP” button, fill the new IP and
new mask to configure and send to device. Refresh automatic detection to confirm the change and then you will work
properly. After check the communication with the device, by clicking on “Import IED to DB” lets you load an IED to
project.
From both options, import from file or from device, you get the dialog window show below.
Fill device family and select/ create voltage level and bay and click on “Import” button to finish.

XI.3. PROTECTION CONFIGURATION
XI.3.1 IED Properties

If you just import an icd file, probably you need to update the communication data (IP address, mask and OSI
parameters).
For this, from main menu, on tools option – IED properties, or from toolbar button on icon will appear the
following window with different tabs.
Select AP1 tab and fill the communication parameters necessary for IED configuration.
The IP address and the status communication with device are shown on the application status bar. Ej.;
XI.3.2 Communications
You can access to IEC 61850 configurations from left menu on “Configuration” option or from top menu.
When the tab “IEC 61850 Server” is opened, on the left side of the application the tree view with the model data from
device is shown.
This tree view shows the different logical devices (LDs) and the different logical
nodes (LNs) within each.
IEC 61850 standards, the configuration data sending by device (Reports or Goose
messages) is performed in two steps:
• First, you have to define the Dataset which you send in the Report or
Goose message.
• Second, you have to configure the Report Control Block (R.C.B) or Goose
Control Block (G.C.B.) where all the characteristics of each report or goose message
are.
According to IEC 61850 standards, Datasets and Control Block are created on LN
level, so first, select the LN level where you want to create it.
If there is no LN selected, buttons for the Datasets, Report control blocks and
transmission Gooses configuration will be disabled.

Once Datasets, Report Control Blocks or transmission Gooses are configured, will be shown as branches on the LN.
On the IEC 61850 Server configuration tab you have:
 A toolbar with the following options:
o Dataset: Open the Dataset configuration dialog box.
o R.C.B: Open Report Control Blocks configuration dialog box.
o GOOSEs: Open the transmission Goose message configuration dialog box.
o GoosesRx: Open reception Goose message configuration dialog box.
o Collapse/Expand: Collapse or expand the dataset list on tab.
 Data grid with dataset:
o The data grid shows the information group by Datasets.
o In each Dataset row are the Report Control Block and Gooses associated with that Dataset.
Other access for Dataset configuration;
 By right–clicking on child nodes in tree view, a contextual menu will appear:
o On LN node allows:
 Open the Dataset and Goose configuration dialog box.
 Create a new Dataset and new Goose.
o On Dataset allows:
 Properties: Open configuration dialog box.
 Delete: Only enabled if not have any control block associated.
o On Report Control Block allows:
 Delete.

o On Goose Control Block allows:
 Delete.
 From data grid rows:
o On Dataset row allows:
 Delete: Only enabled if not have any control block associated.
 Create a new Dataset and new Goose.
o On Report Control Block row allows:
 Delete.
o On Goose Control Block row allows:
 Delete.
XI.3.3 Datasets
By clicking on Dataset (1) button configure the members of Dataset selected or define a new Dataset.

By using the “Edit” button, the members to be inserted in each Dataset can be selected (both at basic and FCD level,
selecting it in the filter on the tool bar).
Criteria used in the configuration of:
• To configure DataSets for Report messages is recommended to use the filter “Functional Constrain”. With
this filter is included in the DataSet the data reference, which will be an structure including the data status,
quality and timestamp.
• To configure DataSets for Goose messages is recommended to use the filter “Basic Type”. With this filter is
included in the DataSet the data attributes references independently. This is because in Goose messages the
data timestamp is not sent.
The FC (Functional Constrain) used for the Reports and Gooses messages are:
• ST: Para configuración de señales
• MX: Para configuración de medidas.

XI.3.4 Report Control Blocks (RCB)

The Report control block associated to a Dataset, will be configured by selecting the LLN0 node of the protection and
clicking on the RCB.
A dialog box to configure is as show below
You define or configure an existing RCB. It is also possible to configure the Dataset which is associated to, and also
the trigger options and optional fields of each RCB, as well as if it is buffered or unbuffered.
XI.3.5 Goose Control Blocks (GOCB)

The transmission goose control blocks are configured in the same way as the RCBs. By clicking on GOOSEs button a
dialog box appears as show bellow.
In this section you configure the details and the Access Point of the Goose, which contains the MAC-Multicast the
gooses are sent to (as well as the VLAN and AppID parameters).

XI.3.6 Goose Subscription

In order to configure the reception gooses, we have to import the IED which will publish the GOOSEs we want to
subscribe to. So, run the iedFactory and import IEDs using the cid configuration files (which must have the
transmission GOOSE configured). Let’s have an example of goose subscription (publisher and subscriber in the same
project):
1. Select the subscriptor IED and open the configuration IEC 61850 Server in pacFactory application.
2. To create a new subscription GOOSEs publish by any protection imported in the project, click on
“GooseRx” button.
3. The subscription dialog box appears and you can select the publisher GOOSE control block we want to
subscribe to. Select it and by clicking on left arrow button will appear in the subscriptions list. To finish,
accept the subscription with the “Accept” button.
4. To check the subscription, navigate to line1 IED, in the LD GOOSERx or in LLN0 node. You have to see a
Dataset and a GOCB that match with the GOCB of the protection (check it with the properties option).

XI.3.7 Settings
The protection settings can be initialized through substation Factory application.
These initializations are written down in a cid file which will be sent to the protection that will consider them as initial
settings.
Every time a protection setting is changed from any interface (display, console, IEC 61850 customer or any other), the
cid file is updated with the new value. The configuration file (cid) with the last setting values of the protection can
always be retrieved through the FTP or through the IEC 61850 file service.
Must be taken into account when a cid is sent, the protection will update settings with the new coming data in this cid
file.
XI.3.8 Commands
The commands accepted by the protection are configured and mapped in the device (factory settings). Commands are
configured with the control service “direct operate with normal security”

XI.3.9 Private parts

To finish with the IED particularization, the private data, which allow configuring the LOG system, have to be checked,
and offset has to be given to the local time, and enable the storage of the oscillography/faults/settings in a file etc.
Insert private part
These private data leave the factory with default values and, depending on the needs, they are usually modified. The
list of the parameters that can be configured and their meaning are the following:
 Maximum number of connections: it is the maximum number of MMS connections that are allowed
simultaneously. It has a maximum of 6.
 Log file: configuration of the LOG file. Each active bit indicates where the unit debug information is going to be
dumped.
 Local Time: Deviation of the local time regarding the UTC, positive or negative value of such deviation. If at 0,
the local time coincides with the UTC.
 Configurator: IP port for the communication with the configurator. If this field is not filled, it has a default value
(49200).
 Order mode: special mode where the order locking are not checked before executing them. If at 1, the lockings
are not checked.
 Time Out Aplic: Indicates the time, in seconds, that must elapse without receiving any information through port
102 (MMS) before the server closes the connection. This value is used to avoid that connections that have
stopped sending data during an indicated time (when a possible error) are still occupying an open connection of
the server. .
 Telnet: indicates the TCP port through which the de Log information is taken out when this log is active.
 Parsing: how restrictive we want the parsing is. With a value different to zero. It checks that there is enough
space for the writing of the setting values in the icd. In case there is no enough space, the icd is not validated
 Refresh time: after an order, the opClsOr and opOpnOr signals take some values regarding the state of the order.
With Refreshing time, we indicate the time after which, once the order is received, we set the value of such
signals at zero. The time will be in seconds.
 It can be also chosen if you want to store the oscillos, faults and settings in files, inside the unit file system, by
selecting the ConfDomain tab.
oscillos/faults/settings
configuration tab

XI.4. PROTECTION UPDATE

Once all the configuration steps have been carried out in the pacFactory, this configuration has to be uploaded into the IED.
For that, we will use Sending through FTP button.
By clicking on FTP sending button will appear a dialog box where you must fill the user name and the password, then click
“Upload” and select the path to save the cid file (you need it later on).
The unit is reset and starts with the new configuration after some minutes (depending on the data and service model sent).
This time is needed because the device is self-configured from this cid file (no change into proprietary or binary format is
done).

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 
APPENDIX XII. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

The self-checking constantly performed by the unit, can detect the following situations:
Critical hardware error

Error in the converter reference voltage
Error in the converter
Error in the FLASH memory recording
Error in the relays activation
Error in the SPI communication (between micro and DSP)
Non critical hardware error
Clock synchronization error
HW error corrected
In the event of any failure detection, the alarm will remain until the failure is disappeared. This alarm can be visualised through:
Status screen
Control events
Events
Digital outputs
Led
XII.1. FAILURE DETECTION

The failure detection can happen in various ways.
Status screen

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 
In the section “Protection status” (marked on the picture), we can find the situation in which is currently the protection,
through four signalisations:
Protection in service
Critical error
Non critical error
Error in ADC converter
By normal functioning, only the signalisation (in red) for protection in service must be on. Any of the other 3 signalisations
indicate an unusual situation.
Control signals
If the hardware status signal (digital signal “HW status” from the section “List of available signals”, Appendix III) is by 0, this
indicates that some unusual situation has appeared (critical error) in the unit. By 1 it indicates Hardware OK.
Digital outputs
A digital output can be programmed with the signal “HW status”, which will be activated by normal functioning and de-
activated by critical error. If the opposite logic is desired, this can be done through the programmable logic signals.
Leds
The programmable Leds count with the same options as the digital outputs.
The non programmable bicolour Led (OK/F) indicates:
Correct functioning if green
Critical error detection if red
Events
As well as indicating if the error is or not critical, the events also indicate the type of error detected and they are the ones
quoted in the first part of this chapter.
XII.2. ERROR HANDLING PROCEDURE

The procedure will depend on the detected error and the unit status.
The “HW errors corrected” event indicates that the appeared problems have been resolved.
If the unit is off, check that the power supply is correct. If the unit is well supplied, contact the technical service.
If the unit is on but shows failure, return to the events screen and check which type of error it is:
If critical error, with no specific indication, is shown and the error persists after turning the unit off and on, contact the
technical service.
If converter or reference voltage error is shown. Check the Measurements, and if correct turn off and on the unit; if the
error does not disappear, contact the technical service.
If Clock error is shown, synchronize manually. If the error persists, contact the technical service.
If error in the Flash memory recording is shown, send the settings again. If error persists contact the technical service.

APPENDIX XIII. RECEPTION TESTS
XIII.1. MATERIAL NEEDED

Three-phase voltage and current generator unit with variable frequency of type <0.5.
Chronometer unit with pick up by voltage or current injection with <0.001s accuracy
Wiring.
Vdc power supply +-10% (Vdc depending on the model).
XIII.2. MEASUREMENT TESTS

The measurement range is up to 1.2 times the nominal value (5 A). The error made in this range must be lower than the
0.5% of 1.2*nominal value
The error made in the protection range must be lower than the al 3% of the introduced value.
The worker decides the points to check but those below are recommended:
Current (A) Voltage(V)

0,5 20
1 50
5 (nominal) 65 (aprox. nominal)
10 80
50
XIII.2.1 Measurements in display

The measurements will be made by injecting voltages and currents in a phase and checking in the display that only
this phase presents a value different to 0 and that it is inside the defined ranges.
Besides, it is important to take into account that the measurements in secondary and primary values (multiplied by the
transformation ratio of the measurement transformer) must appear in the display.
XIII.2.2 Measurements in Console

The measurements will be made by injecting voltages and currents in a phase and checking in the display that only
this phase presents a value different to 0 and that it is inside the defined ranges.
Besides, it is important to take into account that, in the Consoles; the measurements in secondary values in the state
screen, and in primary values in the measurement and control screen (multiplied by the transformation ratio of the
measurement transformer)
This test must be carried out for all the phases and the measurements will be seen in the console.
XIII.3. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
XIII.3.1 Hardware status

Checking, with the relay off, that the output contact DO10 (“HW status”) is close. Feed the relay checking that this
contact opens.
Besides, when turning on the unit, led no.8 must be kept in green. (“HW status”)

XIII.3.2 Instantaneous units (current, voltage, frequency)

This protocol can be used for any current and voltage instantaneous type device, the unit has. The most usual ones are
the following ones.
Phases overcurrent Instantaneous

Neutral overcurrent Instantaneous
Phases overvoltage Instantaneous
A testing unit prepared to measure tipping times will be used to carry out all these tests
Disable the corresponding timed function and all the functions that are not being tested.
Pick-up and dropout during the trip

The instantaneous additional time will be set to 0 sec.
They will be tested by making I, V increasing slopes (depending on the unit that is being tested) from 90% up to
110% of the setting, making a note of the value for which the instantaneous picks up. When reaching the moment of
the trip, you must stay for a while in it checking that there is no dropout and that it remains tripped.
A decreasing slope will be carried out to the drop-out point taking note of this value. The worker decides the points to
check but those below are recommended:
Current (A) Voltage (V)

6 50
10 65
20 80
40
In order to check the undervoltages, the slopes will be reverse. First the decreasing slope to pick up and then the
increasing one to drop out.
Check that when tripping the corresponding digital outputs and LEDs are activated. After each test, make a " Fault
Acknoweledge” to turn off the LEDs..
Instantaneous trip speed

It is a question of testing the speed with the relay trips when the tripping time is 0. So the instantaneous additional
time will be set to 0 sec.
It will be tested by giving a higher value than the set pick-up (2 times for current, 1.2 times for voltage) making notes
about the time the instantaneous picks up.
In order to carry out this test a chronometer picked up by the signal injection and stopped by the tripping relay
operation.
Suggested setting values: Those of the pick-up and drop out.
The tripping time must be lower than 50 ms.
Instantaneous trip with additional

The same as the previous one, for different settings of the additional time, making notes of the time in which the
instantaneous trips. The error must not exceed the 5% of the programmed time or 50 ms (the highest one)
Function locking test

Check that if the input programmed as locked is activated there are no trips in the corresponding function (this is the
same for any function).
XIII.3.3 Timed units (current, voltage)

This protocol is useful for any unit of current and voltage timed unit. The most usual are the following ones:
Phase overcurrent timing

Neutral overcurrent timing

A testing unit prepared to measure tipping times will be used to carry out all these tests
Disable the corresponding instantaneous function and all the functions that are not being tested.
Pick-up and drop-out

The test will be carried out in a similar way to the instantaneous one. The tripping curve type will be set as one of fixed
time and with a 0 tripping time
Check that when tripping the corresponding digital outputs and LEDs are activated. After each test, make a " Fault
Acknoweledge” to turn off the LEDs
Fixed time
The test will be carried out in a similar way to the instantaneous one
Curve tripping time

The test will be carried out in the same way as that for the fixed time, but setting the timing unit with some curve
types and the different indexes that are shown in the Appendix II, where the theoretical operation times are indicated.
The time measurements will be repeated for different points of the tripping curve and for different settings according
to the worker opinion.
XIII.3.4 Current unbalance units

These units work to exceed the I2 threshold (Negative sequence current)
The test will be the same as those for the instantaneous and phase timing, but current will be injected in the three
phases with a definite values.
Phase protection units must be disabled.
Picks-up
The test will be the same as those for the instantaneous and phase timing
The tripping time must be set to the minimum (0.1sec) and if it is a time unit set the time curve to fixed time.
Currents from the same module, which have a 120º phase difference with the values appearing in the tables below,
are injected. Then phase A is being increased until the protection trips. Each current increase must last at least 0.1
seconds in order to have time to trip.
IR
120º 120º
120º
IT IS
When it trips the tripping I2 will be calculated to see the error made in the following way:
I2.trip(s)=(|IRtrip|-|Ifixed|)/3
The tests must be repeated for different fixed C and for different setting. The recommended settings are the following
ones:
I2=I reverse seq fixed Fixed current

1 3
2 5
4 10

Tripping times
The procedure is the same as the one for the instantaneous and unbalance timing. For timing, the reverse time curves
will be checked.
Currents from the same module, which have a 120º phase difference with the values appearing in the table below, are
injected. The time the protection takes to trip is timed.
XIII.3.5 Residual current units

These units work to exceed the I0 threshold (Negative sequence current)
The test will be the same as those for the instantaneous and phase timing, but current will be injected in the three
phases with a definite values.
Phase protection units must be disabled.
Picks up
The timing unit and the instantaneous one are checked in the same way.
The tripping time must be set to the minimum (0.1seg) and if it is a timing unit, set the time curve to fixed time.
Currents from the same module, which have a 120º phase difference with the values appearing in the tables below,
are injected. Then phase A is being increased until the protection trips. Each current increase must last at least 0.1
seconds in order to have time to trip.
When tripping the trip I0 will be calculated to see the error made in the way below::
I0.trip (s)=(|IRtrip|-|Ifixed|)/3
The same test must be repeated for the different Ifixed and for the different settings. But the following settings are
recommended:
I0=reverse set seq current Fixed current

1 3
2 5
4 10
Tripping times
The procedure is the same as the one for the instantaneous and unbalance timing. For timing, the different reverse
time curves will be checked.
Currents from the same module, which have a 120º phase difference with the values appearing in the table below, are
injected. The time the protection takes to trip is timed.
XIII.4. COIL SUPERVISION

It is an automatism formed by 4 inputs and 2 outputs by each winding.
Input Output
Trip circuit with open breaker Trip circuit failure
Trip circuit with close breaker Close circuit failure
Close circuit with open breaker
Close circuit with close breaker
When the breaker is closed, if the “Close circuit with close breaker” input is deactivated, after 20 seconds it must give a
close circuit failure, activating that output. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output must be
deactivated
When the breaker is closed, if the “Trip circuit with close breaker” input is deactivated, after 20 seconds it must give a trip
circuit failure, activating that output. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output must be deactivated

When the breaker is open, if the “Close circuit with open breaker” input is deactivated, after 20 seconds it must give a close
circuit failure, activating that output. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output must be deactivated.
When the breaker is open, if the “Trip circuit with open breaker” input is deactivated, after 20 seconds it must give a trip
circuit failure, activating that output. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output must be deactivated.
XIII.5. DISPLAY AND CLOCK TEST

Feed the relay. Check that the two-colored led Ok/F is green. In the display the following texts must appear:
PD300 Protection
Winding no. Xx
n is the unit number of windings.
Xx defines the firmware version. Pushing INTRO the following message must appear.
SEE TIME
Pushing INTRO the unit time will appear again. Check that the second digits change..
DATA ##-##-##
TIME ##-##-##
Turn off the unit and wait for a minute. Return to “See time” and check that the time is now 1 minute ahead than when it
turned off. It means that the battery is OK.
Push ESC. You must see
SEE TIME
Push ESC. You must see

PD300 protection
Winding no. Xx
XIII.6. UNIT TIME SETTING

Push the button “Synchronize” that appears at the top of the “Status” screen of the Protection Console. There will appear a
window with the PC time and date.
Push OK and check if the relay accepts the data/time sent.

20BRECEPTION, STORAGE,
Parque INSTALLATION
Tecnológico de Bizkaia AND 
TESTS108
• Edificio
48170 Zamudio, Bizkaia, Spain
Tel +34 94 601 8900
Fax +34 94 601 8901
ingeteamtd@ingeteam.com
Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution, S.A.

PD300 User Manual www.ingeteam.com 210

Pd300 Multifunction Protection: Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pd300 Multifunction Protection: Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PD300 MULTIFUNCTION PROTECTION

Ingeteam T&D reserves the right to make any

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ..........................................................................................................................................7

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

4.2.3 Instantaneous differential ........................................................................................................................42

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

6.2 Control messages .............................................................................................................................................67

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

VIII.3. Unit addresses map ................................................................................................................................... 169

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

1.1 MANUAL SCOPE

Functions 2 winding model and generator

Functions only in generator

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

Phase currents measurements

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

1.3 MODEL CODING

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

1.4 USER INTERFACE

1.5 HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

Power supply nominal voltage

Number of digital inputs/outputs

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

Measurement range of the current transformers

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

1.7.1 Electrical tests

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

1.7.2 Environmental tests

1.7.3 Mechanical tests

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

1.8 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Wiring diagram example.

Pin-type 2-winding models

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

Wiring diagram example.

Closed-type 2-winding models

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

Wiring diagram example.

Pin-type 3-winding models

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

Wiring diagram example.

Closed-type 3-winding models

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

Wiring diagram example.

Pin type generator winding models

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

Wiring diagram example

Closed type generator winding models

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

Inodc = pickup value for current without dc component

1.9.1 Trafos saturation

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

2.1 CONSTRUCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS. HORIZONTAL BOX (PD300H)

2.2 CONSTRUCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS. VERTICAL BOX (PD300V)

2.3 CONSTRUCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS. TCP MOUNTED

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

2.4 REAR TERMINALS

2 and 3 winding model (all for pin type terminals)

2 winding model with closed type terminals for analogue inputs

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

3 winding model with closed type terminals for analogue inputs